Zest Air Airbus MEL Issue 3 Rev 2
Zest Air Airbus MEL Issue 3 Rev 2
Zest Air Airbus MEL Issue 3 Rev 2
Holder of this manual is responsible for updating and maintaining the document by
properly incorporating any revisions issued duly approved by Civil Aviation Authority of
the Philippines (CAAP). On receipt of revisions, insert revised pages in the manual and
enter insertion date and affixed initials in the appropriate field.
REVISION INSERTED
NO. DATE ON BY
00 14 Feb 2012 Original
01 21 May 2012
02 22 Jun 2012
Manager – QA/QC.......................................................................................................... 03
A+ Manila.......................................................................................................................... 06-1
A+ Cebu........................................................................................................................... 06-2
+
A Davao......................................................................................................................... 06-3
Aircraft 07
VP – Maintenance ........................................................................................ 09
FOREWORD
This Minimum Equipment List (MEL) is a manual with the effectivity stated on G6 Section – Aircraft
Identification.
All manual holders and users are encouraged to forward their questions and suggestions regarding
the Minimum Equipment List. Any questions with respect to use of this manual or information
contained herein shall be directed to:
CONTENT
ECAM Alert/MEL Entries - When a caution/warning has been displayed on ECAM E/WD, this
section helps to identify the corresponding MEL entry point.
Minimum Equipment List items - Contains accepted list of equipment which may be inoperative
for aircraft dispatch and/or clearly specified NO GO items if necessary. (See Preamble for more
details).
When a MEL item calls for a flight crew action, a corresponding OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE is
described after the MEL item. When a MEL item calls for maintenance procedure, a procedure can
be found in an extended form in AMM (Aircraft Maintenance Manual) by referring to the
Deactivation/Reactivation Index at the beginning. This lists the MEL item numbers and cross refers
to the appropriate AMM maintenance procedures.
Configuration Deviation List - Contains list of secondary airframe which may be missing.
3
1 4
5 6
7
8 9 10 11 12
13
14 16
15 17
G2 PREAMBLE
OBJECTIVES
An airplane is type certificated with all required equipment in operating conditions. If deviations from
this type certificated configuration and equipment required by the operating rules were not
permitted, the aircraft could not be flown in revenue service unless such equipment was operable.
Experience has proven that the operation of every system or components installed on the aircraft is
not necessary, in specific conditions and during limited period, when the remaining instruments and
equipment provide an acceptable level of safety. Therefore, certain conditional deviations from the
original requirement are authorized to permit continued or uninterrupted operation of the aircraft in
revenue flight; they are published in the Minimum Equipment List related to applicable regulations
specific operations or airlines particular definition.
This MEL is the regular basis for allowing Zest Air to utilize the aircraft when some systems or
components are inoperative, in specified conditions and for a limited period of time, under the
condition that an acceptable safety level be maintained by appropriate design redundancies,
procedures and limitations.
PRINCIPLES
For the sake of brevity, the MEL does not include obviously required items as wings, control
surfaces, engines, landing gear, etc… or items which do not affect the airworthiness of the aircraft
such as galley equipment, entertainment systems, passenger convenience items, etc.
Thus, all items which are related to the airworthiness of the aircraft and not included in the list are
automatically required to be operative for each flight. Unless otherwise specified in the exceptions
column, the MEL does not define “where or when” an inoperative item is to be repaired or replaced
but rather indicates those instruments and items of equipment that may be inoperative for certain
flight conditions, with the intent that no revenue flight can takeoff from an airport with inoperative
equipment other than that specified.
The failure of the instruments or items of equipment in excess of those allowed to be inoperative by
the MEL causes the aircraft to be unairworthy. The MEL makes no distinction between what is
required for the flight between origin and destination (including the intermediate stops) and what is
required for a flight beyond the scheduled arrival point.
The MEL is intended to permit operation with inoperative items of equipment for a period of time
until rectifications can be accomplished. It is important that rectification be accomplished at the
earliest opportunity. In order to maintain an acceptable level of safety and reliability, the MEL
establishes limitations on the duration of and conditions for operation with inoperative equipment.
MEL utilization implies that the aircraft is operated within the framework of a controlled and sound
program of repairs and parts replacement.
Zest Air is responsible for exercising the necessary operational control to assure that no aircraft is
dispatched or flown with one or more MEL item inoperative for an indefinite period and without first
determining that any interface or interrelationship between inoperative systems or components will
not result in a degradation in the level of safety and/or an undue increase in workload.
The exposure to additional failures during operation with failed inoperative systems or components
must also be considered to determine that an acceptable level of safety is being maintained.
This MEL may not deviate from requirements of the Flight Manual limitations section, emergency
procedures, or airworthiness directives, unless the flight manual or airworthiness directive provides
otherwise.
When an MMEL revision is issued, an operator will have 90 days from the date of revision to submit the
revised MEL to the authority. (Reference: JAR-MMEL/MEL.060(c))
While the approval of the revised MEL is on process, Zest Air may use the MMEL for dispatch, provided
it is with concurrence with the Civil Aviation Authority of the Philippines.
This section lists all the ECAM alerts. The ECAM monitors the condition of some systems. In the case of
malfunction of one or more systems, the ECAM provides the flight crew with an associated ECAM alert.
Refer to ECAM and MAINTENANCE STATUS. For each ECAM alert, this section indicates the
associated MEL item (if any) to be applied for the dispatch. When an ECAM alert reports a system
failure, the flight crew and the maintenance personnel should refer to this section as a user-friendly entry
point in the MEL.
ECAM
The A320 Family aircraft is equipped with the Electronic Centralized Aircraft Monitoring (ECAM)
which provides different levels of aircraft systems monitoring messages:
‐ ECAM warning
‐ ECAM advisory
‐ ECAM caution
‐ ECAM memo
ECAM warning and ECAM caution messages are listed in the "MEL Entries" section.
ECAM advisory and ECAM memo messages are not listed in the "MEL Entries" section and are
not MEL relevant.
At the beginning of each ATA chapter of the "MEL Item" section, the related MAINTENANCE
messages which may be displayed on the STATUS SD page are listed in the Sub-Chapter "00"
with the associated dispatch status.
A MAINTENANCE message indicates the presence of a category of failure which can only be
identified by interrogation of the CFDS.
Operator must implement procedures to manage the MAINTENANCE messages and associated
CFDS messages, to handle fault recording and repair within the repair interval C (10 days).
All MAINTENANCE messages have a repair interval C except the following messages: DAR, DMU
and QAR which have a repair interval D.
Dispatch with MAINTENANCE messages displayed on the STATUS SD page is permitted without
condition except for the following messages:
‐ DMC 1/3: Refer to Item 31-00-05 DMC 1/3 MAINTENANCE Message (Applicable to all)
‐ DMC 2/3: Refer to Item 31-00-06 DMC 2/3 MAINTENANCE Message (Applicable to all)
‐ AIR BLEED: Refer to Item 36-00-01 AIR BLEED MAINTENANCE Message (Applicable to all except RP-C8991)
An ECAM alert may cover one or several failure modes of the monitored system. For each failure
mode, the AIRCRAFT STATUS column may indicate the following status:
NIL : When there is only one failure mode, the AIRCRAFT STATUS column indicates NIL.
When there are several failure modes, the AIRCRAFT STATUS column might give a
short description of each failure mode and/or a simple way to identify each failure
mode. If the MEL does not give this information, the column displays NIL.
Actual alert : This indicates that the monitored system is inoperative. The failure mode
is the failure of the monitored system.
False alert : This indicates that the monitoring system is inoperative. The failure mode is the
failure of the monitoring system. The monitored system remains fully operative.
For each failure mode, the CONDITION OF DISPATCH column gives the applicable MEL item(s) for
dispatch. But the flight crew is responsible for checking that the condition of the aircraft
systems/components complies with the MEL requirements. If not, the dispatch of the aircraft is
not permitted.
The CONDITION OF DISPATCH column may also give the following alternate possibilities:
NO DISPATCH : It is not permitted to dispatch the aircraft when the ECAM displays this alert.
Not related to MEL: The ECAM alert does not report a system failure but a reversible abnormal
condition such as the state of a system or an aircraft configuration or an
external condition. This condition is not a system failure and is not related to
MEL. The MEL shall not be used.
This is not a NO-GO situation. The corrective action to revert to normal
condition is immediate, obvious or well known by flight crew and/or
maintenance personnel.
This section lists the equipment, components, systems or functions that are safety-related and that are
temporarily permitted to be inoperative at departure provided that Zest Air complies with the associated MEL
requirements.
Note: One single computer may include several functions. The corresponding MEL item is either:
‐ The computer: The MEL does not consider the loss of a single function. In this case, when one
function is inoperative, Zest Air must consider that the computer is inoperative.
‐ Each function separately. In this case, if several functions are inoperative, Zest Air must apply all
the related MEL items.
ITEM NUMBERING
A code of three pairs of digits or four pairs of digits identifies each MEL item.
The three first digits of this numbering system follow the ATA Spec 2200.
For practical reasons, the second pair of digit also follows the below Airbus organization:
The last pair of digits is the item rank. The item rank complies with the following Airbus
organization rules:
DISPATCH CONDITIONS
The dispatch conditions indicate (for each applicable item) the suitable conditions, limitations (placards,
operational procedures, maintenance procedures) necessary to ensure that an acceptable level of safety is
maintained.
Some MEL items may have several dispatch conditions. Each dispatch condition offers a different option to
dispatch the aircraft. A reference identifies each dispatch condition.
EXAMPLE 27-10-01C
‐ 27-10-01 corresponds to the item number,
‐ The letter "C" identifies the dispatch condition within the item 27-10-01.
Note: If an Operator receives only the dispatch conditions 27-10-01B and 27-10-01D, this
means that the dispatch conditions 27-10-01A and 27-10-01C do not apply to Zest Air’s
fleet (this does not mean that the dispatch conditions 27-10-01A and 27-10-01C are
missing from the MEL).
PROVISO
Each dispatch condition has one or several requirements, called provisos. Provisos are numbered
1), 2), 3)...
Zest Air must comply with all the provisos of the selected dispatch condition.
REPAIR INTERVAL
Each dispatch condition has an associated repair interval. The preamble of this MEL defines the repair
interval categories. A dash symbol replaces the repair interval in the following case:
‐ For items that refer to another manual (Weight and Balance, CDL…). The MEL is not the
appropriate manual for this item.
‐ For NO-GO items.
Inoperative items, deferred in accordance with the MEL, must be rectified at or before the expiration of
the repair interval that is established by the following letter designators given in the "Repair Interval"
column.
Repair Interval A : No standard interval is specified, however, items in this category shall be rectified
in accordance with the dispatch conditions stated in the MEL. Where a time period is specified in
calendar days, it shall start at 00:01 on the calendar day following the day of discovery.
Where a time period is specified in number of flights or flight hours, it shall start at the beginning of the
first flight following the discovery of the failure.
Repair Interval B : Items in this category shall be rectified within three (3) consecutive calendar days,
excluding the day of discovery.
For example, if it were recorded at 13:00 on January 26th, the 3-day interval begins at 00:01 on
January 27th and ends at 23:59 on January 29th.
Repair Interval C : Items in this category shall be rectified within ten (10) consecutive calendar days,
excluding the day of discovery.
For example, if it were recorded at 13:00 on January 26th, the 10-day interval begins at 00:01 on
January 27th and ends at 23:59 on February 5th.
Repair Interval D : Items in this category shall be rectified within one hundred and twenty (120)
consecutive calendar days, excluding the day of discovery.
NBR INSTALLED
Each dispatch condition has a “number installed” that specifies the quantity of equipment, components,
systems or functions installed on the aircraft. This quantity corresponds to the aircraft type certified
configuration and, therefore required for all flight conditions, unless otherwise indicated in the “number
required” in conjunction with the provisos of the dispatch condition.
NBR REQUIRED
Each dispatch condition has a “number required” that specifies the minimum quantity of equipment,
components, systems or functions that must be operative for dispatch in accordance with the provisos
of the dispatch condition.
PLACARD
The dispatch condition may require putting a placard in the cockpit. The control(s), and/or indicator(s)
that the flight crew can access in flight and that are related to inoperative equipment, component,
system or function should be clearly placarded to inform the flight crew of the equipment condition.
In the PDF format, the "YES" in the "Placard" column indicates the request for a placard. In the digital
LPCB format, the "PLACARD" symbol indicates the request for a placard. However, the absence of
placard request in the MEL does not prevent Zest Air from placarding.
Zest Air should determine the placard wording and location unless the MEL dispatch condition requires
a specific wording and location.
Zest Air should determine the personnel (maintenance and/or flight crew) authorized to placard items.
The dispatch condition may require an operational or maintenance procedure to ensure an acceptable
level of safety.
The (o) symbol identifies an operational procedure.
The (m) symbol identifies a maintenance procedure.
The (o)(m) symbol means that the dispatch condition requires both an operational procedure and a
maintenance procedure.
Zest Air is responsible to ensure that all operational and maintenance procedures are appropriately
performed regardless of who performs the procedures.
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
The (o) symbol indicates that the dispatch condition requires a specific operational procedure to
permit operation of the aircraft with the inoperative item.
The flight crew must read the content of the operational procedure before each flight. The operational
procedure must be applied before each flight. However, the dispatch condition might specify a different
periodicity. In this case this operational procedure must be applied before the first MEL dispatch and
must be repeated at the defined periodicity. The operational procedures are split and organized into
specific flight phases. The flight crew has to apply the part of the operational procedure related to the
relevant flight phase.
This section lists the operational procedures associated with the MEL items. The dispatch conditions
may require an operational procedure to permit the dispatch of the aircraft. The operational procedures
are split and organized into specific flight phases. The flight crew has to apply the part of the
operational procedure related to the relevant flight phase.
General Information : This part includes all information that the pilots must know due to MEL condition.
Flight Preparation/Limitation : This part groups all the limitations due to MEL condition that the pilots
must consider for the route selection and flight preparation.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
The (m) symbol indicates that the dispatch condition requires a specific maintenance procedure to
permit operation of the aircraft with the inoperative item.
Purpose of the maintenance procedure may be:
‐ To deactivate a system,
‐ To check a system.
The maintenance procedure is normally a one-time action that must be applied before the first MEL
dispatch. However the dispatch condition may specify a periodicity for repetitive actions. In this case
the maintenance procedure must be applied before the first MEL dispatch and must be repeated at the
defined periodicity.
Qualified maintenance personnel usually perform the maintenance procedures. However other
qualified and authorized personnel can also perform some actions if approved by the CAAP. But only
qualified maintenance personnel can perform procedures that require specialized knowledge or skill, or
that require the use of tools or test equipment.
NOTES
REFERENCES
The references assist Zest Air in complying with MEL requirements. However, as indicated in the
preamble of this MEL (Refer to Criteria for Dispatch), Zest Air is still responsible for determining the
applicable interrelationships and associated requirements.
References are used in the following cases:
‐ To permit the aircraft dispatch, another item has to be considered inoperative, or
‐ Another source of information has to be reviewed and associated restrictions, and/or procedures
must be applied (e.g. ″Refer to FCOM″, or ″Refer to Weight and Balance Manual″),
or
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: G - 9
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
GENERAL
‐ To redirect to the applicable MEL item. In that case, the referred relevant MEL item must be entered
and the associated dispatch conditions must be applied, including the respective (o) and (m)
procedures if any.
The decision of the Commander of the flight to have inoperative items corrected before the flight will
take precedence over the provisions contained in the MEL. The Commander may request
requirements above the minimum listed, whenever in his judgment such added equipment is essential
to the safety of a particular flight under the special condition prevailing at the time.
The MEL cannot take into account all multiple unserviceabilities. Therefore, before dispatching an
aircraft with multiple MEL items inoperative, it must be assured that any interface or inter-relationship
between inoperative items will not result in a degradation in the level of safety and/or an undue
increase in crew workload. It is particularly in this area of multiple discrepancies and especially
discrepancies in related systems, that good judgment, based on the circumstances of the case,
including climatic and en-route conditions, must be used.
When the landing capability of the aircraft is impacted by an inoperative item, the associated MEL
operational procedure provides the maximum landing capability.
The required equipment by certification for CAT 2, CAT 3 SINGLE and CAT 3 DUAL are also listed in
the Flight Manual (Refer to AFM/NORM-22-PA Required Equipment for CAT II and CAT III Approach
and Landing) and the QRH (Refer to QRH/OPS Required Equipment for CAT2 and CAT3).
The equipment to be operative to get CAT 2, CAT 3 SINGLE, or CAT 3 DUAL capability displayed on
the FMAs are listed in the QRH (Refer to QRH/OPS Required Equipment for CAT2 and CAT3).
The MEL does not include the minimum equipment required for RNP operations.
The minimum equipment/functions required to begin RNP operations are listed in the FCOM (Refer
to FCOM/PRO-SPO-51).
When the RVSM capability of the aircraft is impacted by an inoperative item, the associated MEL
operational procedure provides the RVSM limitations.
The minimum equipment/functions required to begin RVSM operations are listed in the Flight Manual
(Refer to AFM/NORM-34 Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM)) and FCOM (Refer to
FCOM/PRO-SPO-50 Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM)).
2) “Considered inoperative” means that The listed item of equipment must be treated as inoperative.
For example, MMEL item 36-11-05 Bleed Air Precooler indicates that associated bleed air supply
system is considered inoperative and therefore MMEL item 36-11-01 Bleed Air Supply System
must be applied. Therefore, the “considered inoperative” MMEL item must also be entered and
the associated dispatch conditions must be applied, including the respective (o) and (m)
procedures if any. The shorter rectification interval between the initial inoperative item and
the “considered inoperative” item shall be applied.
3) The Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS) It identifies the faulty system for maintenance
purpose and is not required for dispatch of the aircraft.
4) “VMC” (Visual Meteorological Conditions) – Under IFR or VFR the crew must maintain Visual
Meteorological conditions.
6) “As required by regulations” means that the listed item must comply with applicable operational
regulations.
7) “Required cabin attendant seat”: A seat in the aeroplane cabin which meets the following
conditions:
8) “ER” refers to operations according to “Extended Range Operations of Two Engine airplanes”
requirements.
9) “Days” – Some items have a time interval given in the remarks column of the MEL. Except if
otherwise specified, “days” must be considered as “calendar days” excluding the calendar day
the malfunction was recorded.
10) "Flight Day" means a 24 hour period (from midnight to midnight), as established by Zest Air,
using the local time where maintenance base is located, during which at least one flight for the
affected aircraft is initiated and regardless of the number of flights thereafter shall be acceptable
as long as the flights are flown within the 24-hour timeframe.
12) ”Inflammable or Combustible material” refers to material, which is capable of catching fire and
burning. Where loading of combustible or inflammable material is prohibited no material may be
loaded except the following : cargo handling equipment (unloaded, empty or with ballast), fly
away kits (excluding e.g. cans of hydraulic fluid, cleaning solvents, batteries, capacitors,
chemical generators, etc.), and in-flight service material (return catering – only closed catering
trolleys/boxes, no newspapers, no alcohol or duty free goods). Note: If serviceable tires are
included, they should only be inflated to a minimum pressure that preserves their serviceability.
13) Flight : For the purpose of an MEL : One “flight” is defined as the period of time that begins the
moment at which an aircraft begins to move by its own means in preparation for takeoff,
continues during takeoff and the applicable flight phases, and ends when the aircraft lands and
comes to a complete stop in its parking area.
14) “Reserved” indicates that these items are listed in the MEL for management purposes.
“Reserved” indicates that the system is not installed on the aircraft to which the page sequence
applied. Therefore the name of the item and its associated dispatch conditions are intentionally
left blank.
15) Calendar day: A 24 hour period from 00:01 to 23:59 based on either UTC or local time, as selected by
the Zest Air.
16) Daylight operations : Period between the beginning of the morning civil twilight and the end of the
evening civil twilight relevant to the local aeronautical airspace; or such other period, as may be
prescribed by the Authority.
17) ... provided that system X is operative: The system X must not be reported to be inoperative in the
logbook.
18) ... provided that system X is checked operative: The system X must be checked and confirmed
operative via either an (o) and/or an (m) procedure.
19) “VMC” (Visual Meteorological Conditions): Under IFR or VFR the crew must maintain Visual
Meteorological Conditions.
G7 REFERENCE
If pack flow sensor is affected Refer to Item 21-51-03 Pack Flow Sensor
If pack flow control valve is affected Refer to Item 21-52-01 Air Conditioning Pack
If pack ram air inlet is affected Refer to Item 21-52-02 Air Conditioning Pack Ram Air Inlet
Flap
If turbine bypass valve is affected Refer to Item 21-61-01 Pack Turbine Bypass Valve
ECAM Alert: AUTO FLT REAC W/S DET FAULT (If Installed)
Applicable to: ALL
AIRCRAFT STATUS CONDITION OF DISPATCH
NIL Refer to Item 22-60-03 Reactive Windshear Detection
Function
ME-23 Communications
COM ACARS FAULT *
COM CIDS 1+2 FAULT
COM HF 1(2) DATA FAULT *
COM HF 1(2) EMITTING *
COM SATCOM DATA FAULT *
COM SATCOM FAULT *
COM VHF 3 DATA FAULT *
COM VHF 1(2)(3) EMITTING
If the SMOKE FWD CRG BTL FAULT alert is displayed Refer to Item 26-23-01 Cargo Agent Bottle
on the EWD
If the SMOKE AFT CRG BTL 1 FAULT alert is displayed Refer to Item 26-23-01 Cargo Agent Bottle
on the EWD
If the maintenance confirms that the F/CTL FLAP SYS 2 Refer to Item 27-54-01 Flap Hydraulic
FAULT alert is displayed on the EWD due to a flap motor Motor
failure.
ME-28 Fuel
FUEL APU LP VALVE FAULT
FUEL AUTO FEED FAULT
FUEL CTR TK PUMP 1(2) LO PR
FUEL CTR TK PUMPS LO PR
FUEL CTR TK PUMPS OFF
FUEL ENG 1(2) LP VALVE OPEN
FUEL FQI CH 1(2) FAULT
FUEL L(R) INNER(OUTER) TK HI TEMP
FUEL L(R) INNER(OUTER) TK LO TEMP
FUEL L(R) TK PUMP 1(2) LO PR
FUEL L(R) TK PUMP 1+2 LO PR
FUEL L(R) WING TK LO LVL
FUEL L+R WING TK LO LVL
FUEL L(R) XFR VALVE CLOSED
FUEL L(R) XFR VALVE OPEN
FUEL X FEED VALVE FAULT
If the autobrake function is affected (BRAKE RELEASED Refer to Item 32-42-05 AUTO/BRK Function
message is displayed)
If a tachometer is affected (BRAKE RELEASED Refer to Item 32-42-06 Tachometer
message is displayed)
If a LH L/G proximity detector associated with the LGCIU Refer to Item 32-32-03 LGCIU 2 LH L/G
2 is inoperative: apply the relevant item. Shock Absorber Proximity Detector
or
Refer to Item 32-32-06 LGCIU 2 LH L/G
Down Lock Proximity Detector
or
Refer to Item 32-32-09 LGCIU 2 LH L/G
Up Lock Proximity Detector
or
Refer to Item 32-32-12 LGCIU 2 LH L/G
Doors Open Proximity Detector
or
Refer to Item 32-32-15 LGCIU 2 LH L/G
Doors Closed Proximity Detector
If a Nose L/G proximity detector associated with the Refer to Item 32-32-04 LGCIU 2 Nose
LGCIU 2 is inoperative: apply the relevant item. L/G Shock Absorber Proximity Detector
or
Refer to Item 32-32-07 LGCIU 2 Nose
L/G Down Lock Proximity Detector
or
Refer to Item 32-32-10 LGCIU 2 Nose
L/G Up Lock Proximity Detector
or
Refer to Item 32-32-13 LGCIU 2 Nose
L/G Doors Open Proximity Detector
or
Refer to Item 32-32-16 LGCIU 2 Nose
L/G Doors Closed Proximity Detector
ME-36 Pneumatic
AIR APU BLEED FAULT
AIR APU BLEED LEAK
AIR BLEED 1(2) OFF
AIR ENG HP VALVE FAULT
AIR ENG 1(2) BLEED ABNORM PR
AIR ENG 1(2) BLEED FAULT
AIR ENG 1(2) BLEED LEAK
AIR ENG 1(2)(1+2) BLEED LO TEMP
AIR ENG 1(2) BLEED NOT CLSD
AIR ENG 1(2) LEAK DET FAULT
AIR L(R) WING LEAK
AIR L(R) WING LEAK DET FAULT
AIR X BLEED FAULT
BLEED MONITORING FAULT
BLEED MONIT SYS 1(2) FAULT
ME-52 Doors
DOOR AFT(BULK)(FWD) CARGO
DOOR L(R) AFT AVIONICS
DOOR L(R) AFT CABIN
DOOR L(R) AFT EMER EXIT
DOOR L(R) EMER EXIT
DOOR L(R) FWD AVIONICS
DOOR L(R) FWD CABIN
DOOR L(R) FWD EMER EXIT
21-00-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
21-00-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
21-00-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C - - No
AFT CRG HEAT MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page.
21-00-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
TEMP CTL 1(2) MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page.
21-01-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
21-01-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
21-01-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that all zone duct temperature indications are operative on the COND SD page.
21-01-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
21-01-02-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
21-01-03-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
21-01-04-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
21-01-04-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
21-01-04-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
21-07-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
21-07-01-02 Pack Turbine Bypass Valve Position Indication on the BLEED SD page
Applicable to: ALL
21-07-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
21-07-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative.
21-07-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
21-07-01-05 Pack Flow Control Valve Position Indication on the BLEED SD page
Applicable to: ALL
21-07-01-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
21-07-01-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
21-07-02-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
21-07-02-02 Pressure Safety Valves Position Indication on the CAB PRESS SD page
Applicable to: ALL
21-07-02-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(m) Pressure safety valves may be indicated open provided that both valves are visually
checked closed.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 21-31-00-040-004
21-07-02-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
21-07-03-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
21-07-04-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
May be displayed provided that the avionics extract fan is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 21-26-02 Avionics Extract Fan
21-09-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(m) May be displayed provided that both safety valves are visually checked closed.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 21-31-00-040-005
21-21-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
21-23-01B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative provided that all duct temperatures indications for the cabin are
operative on the COND SD page.
Reference(s)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Two amber crosses replace the cabin zone temperature indications on the COND SD page.
Refer to Item 21-07-03-01 Indications on the COND SD page
The INOP SYS column on the STATUS SD page may display the LAV DET message.
The cabin zone temperature regulation is lost.
The Zone Controller commands fixed FWD and AFT cabin ducts temperature (set to 15 °C or 59 °F).
To recover the cockpit temperature regulation:
‐ HOT AIR pb-sw...........................................................................................................................OFF
‐ To control cockpit temperature, use the COCKPIT selector on the AIR COND overhead panel.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Two amber crosses replace the cabin zone temperature indications on the COND SD page.
Refer to Item 21-07-03-01 Indications on the COND SD page
The INOP SYS column on the STATUS SD page may display the LAV DET message.
The cabin zone temperature regulation is lost.
The Air Conditioning System Controller commands FWD and AFT cabin ducts temperature using the
position of the FWD CABIN selector and the AFT CABIN selector on the AIR COND overhead panel.
Slight effect on cabin comfort may occur.
The cockpit temperature regulation is still operative.
‐ Contact the maintenance personnel to exchange the blower fan and the extract fan.
Only the VENT EXTRACT FAULT alert must then be displayed on the EWD.
‐ When the blower and extract fans are exchanged, Refer to Item 21-26-02 Avionics Extract Fan
(m) Refer to AMM 21-26-00-040-006
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-26-02A Avionics Extract Fan (VENT AVNCS SYS FAULT Alert not
displayed)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Time limitation on ground with electrical network supplied:
OAT (°C) ≤ 38 ≤ 45 ≤ 55
Max time No limit 3h 35 min
Reference(s)
(o)OpsProc 21-26-02B Avionics Extract Fan (Air conditioning inlet valve checked open
before each flight)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Time limitation on ground with electrical network supplied:
OAT (°C) ≤ 38 ≤ 45 ≤ 55
Max time No limit 3h 35 min
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-26-02C Avionics Extract Fan (Avionics ventilation system checked before each flight)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Time limitation on ground with electrical network supplied:
OAT (°C) ≤ 38 ≤ 45 ≤ 55
Max time No limit 3h 35 min
21-26-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
21-26-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-26-04A Avionics Skin Air Outlet Valve
ON GROUND
After application of the maintenance procedure:
Clear the VENT AVNCS SYS FAULT alert displayed on the EWD using the CLR pb.
The VENT AVNCS SYS FAULT alert will be displayed after landing.
If the VENT SKIN VALVE FAULT alert is displayed on the EWD:
Apply the ECAM procedure.
Note: Avionics smoke may be not perceptible from the cockpit due to the opening of the
internal flap of the valve.
In the case of AVIONICS SMOKE alert:
Apply the ECAM procedure even if the smoke is not perceptible.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-26-05A Avionics Skin Air Inlet Valve (Air conditioning inlet valve open
on the ground)
AFTER TAKEOFF
EXTRACT pb-sw...........................................................................................................................AUTO
AFTER LANDING
EXTRACT pb-sw.......................................................................................................................... OVRD
(o) (m) May be inoperative in the open position provided that the avionics ventilation system is
checked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-26-06A Avionics Skin Exchanger Isolation Valve
ON GROUND
After application of the maintenance procedure:
Clear the VENT AVNCS SYS FAULT alert displayed on the EWD using the CLR pb.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-26-06B Avionics Skin Exchanger Isolation Valve
ON GROUND
After application of the maintenance procedure:
Clear the VENT AVNCS SYS FAULT alert displayed on the EWD using the CLR pb.
21-26-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
Note: During ground operations, correct avionics ventilation should be provided.
21-26-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
ON GROUND
After application of the maintenance procedure:
Clear the VENT AVNCS SYS FAULT alert displayed on the EWD using the CLR pb.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-26-09A Avionics Ventilation Filter (VENT AVNCS SYS FAULT Alert
not displayed)
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-26-09B Avionics Ventilation Filter (Air conditioning inlet valve checked
open before each flight)
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-26-09C Avionics Ventilation Filter (Avionics ventilation system checked
before each flight)
21-26-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-26-10A Avionics Equipment Ventilation Computer (AEVC)
IN FLIGHT
In the case of an air conditioning pack failure:
‐ The cabin altitude may reach about 9 700 ft (3 000 m), and
‐ The CAB PR EXCESS CAB ALT alert may be displayed on the EWD.
21-28-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-28-03A AFT Cargo Extraction Fan
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
For live animal transportation, use the Live Animal Transportation Calculation Tool.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-28-04A AFT Cargo Isolation Valve (Valves ckecked closed)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
For live animal transportation, use the Live Animal Transportation Calculation Tool.
DURING COCKPIT PREPARATION
‐ ANN LT selector.......................................................................................................................TEST
‐ Check that the AFT ISOL VALVE pb-sw FAULT light comes on
‐ ANN LT selector............................................................................................................. BRT or DIM
‐ AFT ISOL VALVE pb-sw............................................................................................................ OFF
‐ Check that the AFT ISOL VALVE pb-sw FAULT light does not come on.
Note: If the AFT ISOL VALVE pb-sw FAULT light comes on:
The AFT cargo isolation valve must be secured in the closed position. Refer to Item
21-28-04B AFT Cargo Isolation Valve
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
For live animal transportation, use the Live Animal Transportation Calculation Tool.
ON GROUND
When the AFT cargo isolation valves are secured in the closed position:
The AFT isolation valves are displayed open green on the COND SD page.
(o) Automatic cabin pressure control system 1 may be inoperative provided that:
1) ETOPS is not conducted, and
2) It is deactivated, and
3) The cabin pressure indications on the CAB PRESS SD page are checked operative in
manual mode, and
4) The LDG ELEV selector MAN function is operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-31-01A Automatic Cabin Pressure Control System (CPC, Outflow
Valve AUTO Channel)
(o) OpsProc 21-31-01A Automatic Cabin Pressure Control System (CPC, Outflow
Valve AUTO Channel)
(o) Automatic cabin pressure control system 2 may be inoperative provided that:
1) It is deactivated, and
2) The cabin pressure indications on the CAB PRESS SD page are checked operative in
manual mode, and
3) The LDG ELEV selector MAN function is operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-31-01B Automatic Cabin Pressure Control System (CPC, Outflow Valve AUTO Channel)
(o) OpsProc 21-31-01B Automatic Cabin Pressure Control System (CPC, Outflow Valve AUTO Channel)
21-31-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
21-31-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
21-31-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
BEFORE TAKEOFF
‐ Set the LDG ELEV selector on the CABIN PRESS panel at the destination airport altitude.
‐ On the CAB PRESS SD page, check that the LDG ELEV MAN message is displayed
21-31-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-43-02A AFT Cargo Compartment Heating (Heating system set to OFF)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
For live animal transportation, use the Live Animal Transportation Calculation Tool.
DURING COCKPIT PREPARATION
‐ HOT AIR pb-sw (on the CARGO HEAT overhead panel)..........................................................OFF
‐ On the COND SD page, check that the operative valve (either the hot air pressure regulating valve
or the trim air valve) is indicated closed.
Reference(s)
(o) Refer to OpsProc 21-43-02B AFT Cargo Compartment Heating (Inoperative valve secured
in the closed position)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
For live animal transportation, use the Live Animal Transportation Calculation Tool.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 21-51-00-040-001
21-51-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
21-51-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-51-03A Pack Flow Sensor
GENERAL INFORMATION
The hot air pressure regulating valve automatically closes.
The Flow Control Valve on the affected side operates in pneumatic backup mode.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
If the FWD cargo heating is installed:
For live animal transportation, use the Live Animal Transportation Calculation Tool.
21-52-01A No FL Limitation
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
IN FLIGHT
If BLOWER pb-sw and EXTRACT pb-sw are set to OVRD:
‐ The cabin altitude may reach about 9 700 ft, and
‐ The CAB PR EXCESS CAB ALT alert may be displayed on the EWD
IN FLIGHT
If BLOWER pb-sw and EXTRACT pb-sw are set to OVRD:
‐ The cabin altitude may reach about 9 700 ft, and
‐ The CAB PR EXCESS CAB ALT alert may be displayed on the EWD
(o) One may be operated on heat exchanger cooling only (air cycle machine failure) provided that:
1) The corresponding pack controller is operative, and
2) The affected pack outlet temperature indication is operative on the BLEED SD page.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-52-01G Air Conditioning Pack (One Air Conditioning Pack in Heat Exchanger Cooling
Mode only)
IN FLIGHT
When the TAT is equal to or less than 12°C:
PACK 1(2) pb-sw in "heat exchanger cooling only".................................................................On
If the non affected air conditioning pack fails:
Maximum flight altitude..................................................................................31 500 ft (9 600 m)
DURING DESCENT
If the TAT is above 12°C:
PACK 1(2) pb-sw in "heat exchanger cooling only"............................................................. OFF
21-52-01D No FL limitation
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-52-01D Air Conditioning Pack (One Air Conditioning Pack Inoperative)
DURING COCKPIT PREPARATION
PACK FLOW pb-sw............................................................................................................................ HI
IN FLIGHT
If BLOWER pb-sw and EXTRACT pb-sw are set to OVRD:
‐ The cabin altitude may reach about 9 700 ft, and
‐ The CAB PR EXCESS CAB ALT alert may be displayed on the EWD
IN FLIGHT
If BLOWER pb-sw and EXTRACT pb-sw are set to OVRD:
Continued on next page
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: MI21 - 38
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 21 – AIR CONDITIONING
‐ The cabin altitude may reach about 9 700 ft, and
‐ The CAB PR EXCESS CAB ALT alert may be displayed on the EWD
IN FLIGHT
When the TAT is equal to or less than 12°C:
PACK 1(2) pb-sw in "heat exchanger cooling only".................................................................On
If the non affected air conditioning pack fails:
Maximum flight altitude..................................................................................31 500 ft (9 600 m)
DURING DESCENT
If the TAT is above 12°C:
PACK 1(2) pb-sw in "heat exchanger cooling only"............................................................. OFF
IN FLIGHT
If BLOWER pb-sw and EXTRACT pb-sw are set to OVRD:
‐ The cabin altitude may reach about 9 700 ft, and
‐ The CAB PR EXCESS CAB ALT alert may be displayed on the EWD
IN FLIGHT
If BLOWER pb-sw and EXTRACT pb-sw are set to OVRD:
‐ The cabin altitude may reach about 9 700 ft, and
‐ The CAB PR EXCESS CAB ALT alert may be displayed on the EWD
21-52-01C No FL limitation
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
B 2 1 Yes
IN FLIGHT
If BLOWER pb-sw and EXTRACT pb-sw are set to OVRD:
‐ The cabin altitude may reach about 9 700 ft, and
‐ The CAB PR EXCESS CAB ALT alert may be displayed on the EWD
In the case of failure of the remaining air conditioning pack:
Apply the procedures associated with the AIR PACK 1+2 FAULT and the CAB PR EXCESS
CAB ALT alerts displayed on the EWD.
(o) One may be operated on heat exchanger cooling only (air cycle machine failure) provided that:
1) The corresponding pack controller is operative, and
2) The affected pack outlet temperature indication is operative on the BLEED SD page.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-52-01G Air Conditioning Pack (One Air Conditioning Pack in Heat Exchanger Cooling
Mode only)
IN FLIGHT
When the TAT is equal to or less than 12°C:
PACK 1(2) pb-sw in "heat exchanger cooling only".................................................................On
If the non affected air conditioning pack fails:
Maximum flight altitude..................................................................................31 500 ft (9 600 m)
(m) One or both may be inoperative provided that the affected flap is deactivated in the open position.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 21-61-00-040-002
One may be inoperative in the closed position provided that the associated air conditioning
pack is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 21-52-01 Air Conditioning Pack
Both may be inoperative in the closed position provided that the flight is not pressurized.
Refer to FCOM/PRO-SPO-20 Flight Without Cabin Pressurization
One may be inoperative in the closed position provided that the associated air conditioning
pack is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 21-52-01 Air Conditioning Pack
Both may be inoperative in the closed position provided that the flight is not pressurized.
Refer to FCOM/PRO-SPO-20 Flight Without Cabin Pressurization
21-61-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
21-61-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
(o) Primary channel may be inoperative provided that the hot air pressure regulating valve is
checked closed on the COND SD page.
Note: Unequal passengers distribution may cause high temperature in the rear cabin
when the hot air pressure regulating valve is closed.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-63-01A Zone Controller Channel
Secondary channel may be inoperative provided that the minimum idle on ground is considered
inoperative.
Refer to Item 73-20-05A Minimum Idle on Ground
(o) (m) Primary and secondary channel may be inoperative provided that:
1) The hot air pressure regulating valve is secured in the closed position, and
2) The minimum idle on ground is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 73-20-05A Minimum Idle on Ground
Note: Unequal passengers distribution may cause high temperature in the rear cabin
when the hot air pressure regulating valve is closed.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-63-01C Zone Controller Channel
Note: Unequal passengers distribution may cause high temperature in the rear cabin when more
than one trim air valves are inoperative or when the hot air pressure regulating valve is closed.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
(o) One or more may be inoperative provided that the affected valve is checked closed on the
COND SD page.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-63-02A Cockpit and Cabin Trim Air Valve (Affected valve checked closed)
IN FLIGHT
If the affected zone temperature becomes uncomfortable:
HOT AIR pb-sw.....................................................................................................................OFF
(o) One or more may be inoperative provided that the hot air pressure regulating valve is
checked operative on the COND SD page.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-63-02B Cockpit and Cabin Trim Air Valve (Hot air pressure regulating
valve checked operative)
IN FLIGHT
If affected zone temperature becomes uncomfortable:
HOT AIR pb-sw.....................................................................................................................OFF
One or more may be inoperative provided that the hot air pressure regulating valve is
considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 21-63-03 Hot Air Pressure Regulating Valve
Note: Unequal passengers distribution may cause high temperature in the rear cabin when the
hot air pressure regulating valve is closed.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
(o) (m) May be inoperative provided that the hot air pressure regulating valve is secured in the closed
position.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-63-03C Hot Air Pressure Regulating Valve (Affected valve secured in the closed position)
GENERAL INFORMATION
On the COND SD page, the hot air pressure regulating valve is displayed closed amber.
GENERAL INFORMATION
On the COND SD page, the hot air pressure regulating valve is displayed amber open.
(o) (m) May be inoperative provided that the hot air pressure regulating valve is secured in the
closed position.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 21-63-03C Hot Air Pressure Regulating Valve (Affected valve secured in
the closed position)
GENERAL INFORMATION
On the COND SD page, the hot air pressure regulating valve is displayed closed amber.
One may be inoperative on each side provided that ETOPS is not conducted.
For ETOPS, one may be inoperative on each side provided that the AIR COND CTL 1–B
FAULT alert is not displayed on the EWD.
MI-22-30 Autothrust
22-30-01 Autothrust (A/THR)
22-30-02 Autothrust Instinctive Disconnect pb
22-30-03 Autothrust Disengagement Warning
22-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
22-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
(o) One or more indications may be inoperative on both FMAs provided that:
1) ETOPS is not conducted, and
2) The AP is not used.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 22-05-01B AP Related Indications on the FMA
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
RVSM operations are not permitted.
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
One or more indications may be inoperative on both FMAs provided that the autothrust
(A/THR) is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 22-30-01 Autothrust (A/THR)
22-05-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
When one FMA is affected:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 2.
When both FMAs are affected:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
22-05-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 1 No
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
When one AP is inoperative:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
When both APs are inoperative:
RVSM operations are not permitted.
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
When one AP is inoperative:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
When both APs are inoperative:
RVSM operations are not permitted.
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
22-10-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
FOR TAKEOFF
For a takeoff without FDs:
Refer to FCOM/PRO-NOR-SRP-01-30 No Flight Director Takeoff
22-10-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 2 2 No
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
BEFORE APPROACH
If the AP is used for approach:
The operative AP disconnect pb must be assigned to the PF.
(o) Both may be inoperative provided that the AP is not used for approach.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 22-10-04B Take-over pb AP Disconnection Function (Both inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
22-10-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
When both lights are inoperative:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
22-10-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 22-10-06A AP Disengagement Warning
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
RVSM operations are not permitted.
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
22-10-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 1 No
(o) One or two may be inoperative unlocked provided that no autoland is performed.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 22-10-07A Sticks and Rudder Pedals Locking Solenoid in AP Mode
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 2 without autoland.
22-30 – Autothrust
22-30-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that the autothrust (A/THR) is disconnected before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 22-30-01A Autothrust (A/THR)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 2.
22-30-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
(o) One may be inoperative provided that the ability to disconnect the autothrust (A/THR) via
the remaining Instinctive Disconnect pb and by the FCU A/THR pb is checked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 22-30-02A Autothrust Instinctive Disconnect pb
The purpose of the procedure is to check the A/THR disconnection via the remaining Instinctive
Disconnect pb and via the A/THR pb on the FCU.
Check of the A/THR disconnection via the remaining Instinctive Disconnect pb:
‐ A/THR instinctive disconnect pb (non affected autothrust)........................................................Push
‐ Check that the A/THR pb light bars are OFF.
‐ Check that green SPEED and white A/THR indications are no more displayed on the PFD.
‐ A/THR........................................................................................................................................... On
‐ Check that the A/THR pb light bars are ON.
‐ Check that green SPEED and white A/THR indications are displayed on the PFD.
22-30-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
22-60-01 FAC 1
Applicable to: ALL
22-60-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
22-60-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
ON GROUND
If the AUTO FLT FAC 2 FAULT alert is displayed on the EWD
or
If erroneous speeds are displayed:
‐ AUTO FLT/FAC 2/28VDC (121VU M19) C/B................................................................Pull
‐ FAC 2 pb-sw.................................................................................................................OFF
22-60-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
Note: If required, it is not allowed to dispatch with the predictive windshear detection system
operative only.
22-60-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of FMS 1+2 failure:
MCDU NAV B/UP........................................................................................................... Use
Refer to FCOM/DSC-22_20-60-130 MCDU Back Up Navigation.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 22-70-01B Flight Management System (FMS)
IN FLIGHT
In the case of FMS 1+2 failure:
MCDU NAV B/UP........................................................................................................... Use
Refer to FCOM/DSC-22_20-60-130 MCDU Back Up Navigation.
The FMS 2 may be inoperative provided that the flight remains within radio
navaids coverage.
22-70-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
22-70-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative.
22-70-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
22-81-01-01 AP Engagement pb
Applicable to: ALL
22-81-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated autopilot (AP) is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 22-10-01 Autopilot (AP)
22-81-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the autothrust (A/THR) is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 22-30-01 Autothrust (A/THR)
22-81-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 Yes
22-81-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 3 3 No
Must be operative.
22-81-01-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
B 1 0 Yes
22-81-01-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
22-81-01-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
22-81-01-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
22-81-01-09B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 Yes
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated indications are operative on
both PFDs and both NDs.
22-81-01-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 3 0 No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated indication is operative on both PFDs.
22-81-01-11A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 3 0 No
22-81-02-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
22-81-02-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative provided that the unit required for the intended flight is
operative on both EFIS control panels.
22-81-02-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 2 2 No
22-81-02-04 FD pb
Applicable to: ALL
22-81-02-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated FD is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 22-10-02 Flight Director (FD)
22-81-02-05 ILS pb
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8994, RP-C8993, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
22-81-02-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated ILS is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 34-30-04 Instrument Landing System (ILS)
22-81-02-05 LS pb
Applicable to: RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8989 AND RP-C8991
22-81-02-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated ILS is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 34-30-04 Instrument Landing System (ILS)
22-81-02-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 10 0 Yes
22-81-02-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
One may be inoperative provided that the ND unit associated with the operative ND range
selector is operative.
22-81-02-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
One may be inoperative provided that the ND unit associated with the operative ND mode selector is operative.
22-81-02-09 ADF/VOR sw
Applicable to: ALL
22-81-02-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated ADF/VOR indication on ND is
considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 34-06-06 Radio Navaids Indications on the ND
22-81-02-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 4 0 No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated indication is operative on both PFDs.
22-81-02-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 4 0 No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated indication is operative on both PFDs.
22-81-02-11 Optional Data (ARPT, NDB, VOR.D, WPT, CSTR) Display pb light Bars
Applicable to: ALL
22-81-02-11A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 10 0 No
For ETOPS, one may be inoperative for one flight provided that two RMPs, all DUs, both
RAs, both LGCIUs, both FACs, both Automatic Cabin Pressure Control Systems, all
ADIRUs and the Standby ALT Indicator are operative.
22-82-01 MCDU 1
Applicable to: ALL
22-82-01B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
22-82-02 MCDU 2
Applicable to: ALL
22-82-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 Yes
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 22-83-01B Flight Management and Guidance Computer (FMGC)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
MI-23-40 Interphone
23-40-01 Mechanical Call Horn
23-40-02 Flight Crew Interphone System
23-40-03 Flight Crew to Ground Communication System
23-40-04 Service Interphone Jack
MI-23-73-02 DEU A
23-73-02-01 Cabin DEU A
23-73-02-02 Lavatory DEU A
MI-23-73-03 DEU B
23-73-03-01 Cabin DEU B
MI-23-73-06 Handset
23-73-06-01 Cockpit Handset
23-73-06-02 Cabin Handset
23-73-06-03 Cabin Handset Key
23-00-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
23-01-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
23-01-01-31 RCDR GND CTL pb-sw
Applicable to: ALL
ON GROUND
CVR can only be tested through the CVR test pb-sw during the first 5 minutes after supply of the
aircraft electrical network.
23-01-01-31B ON position
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
AFTER LANDING
To stop CVR recording, if needed:
COM/CVR/SPLY (49 VU E14) C/B.........................................................................................PULL
23-01-01-32A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
23-01-01-33A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that the Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 23-71-01 Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR)
23-01-02-31A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
One or more may be inoperative provided that the cockpit handset interphone * is used
for communication between the cockpit and the cabin.
GENERAL INFORMATION
To make troubleshooting easier, Refer to FCOM/PRO-ABN-23 COM VHF 1(2)(3)/HF 1(2)
EMITTING (If Installed)
DURING COCKPIT PREPARATION
To deactivate the HF1 system, apply:
COM HF1 (49 VU HA14) C/B.................................................................................................PULL
or
COM NAV/HF1 (121 VU L10) C/B..........................................................................................PULL
To deactivate the HF2 system, apply:
COM NAV/HF2 (121 VU L13) C/B..........................................................................................PULL
GENERAL INFORMATION
To make troubleshooting easier, Refer to FCOM/PRO-ABN-23 COM VHF 1(2)(3)/HF 1(2)
EMITTING (If Installed)
DURING COCKPIT PREPARATION
To deactivate the VHF1 system, apply:
COM/VHF/1 (49 VU G09) C/B................................................................................................PULL
To deactivate the VHF2 system, apply:
COM NAV/VHF/2 (121 VU L04) C/B...................................................................................... PULL
To deactivate the VHF3 system, apply:
COM NAV/VHF/3 (121 VU L05) C/B...................................................................................... PULL
23-10-01 HF System
Applicable to: ALL
23-10-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 23-10-02A VHF System
23-10-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
23-13-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 2 2 No
23-13-01B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 Yes
23-13-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – Yes
23-20-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Reserved
23-20-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 – –
Reserved
23-31-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
Note: 1. In the case of partial failure of the passenger address system, refer to the
item(s) of the affected system(s).
2. Total failure of the passenger address system (indicated by the COM CIDS 1+2
FAULT alert displayed on the EWD) is not permitted.
23-31-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
23-40 – Interphone
23-40-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
ON GROUND
When the aircraft electrical network is supplied:
Monitor the avionics equipment ventilation in the cockpit.
23-40-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
23-40-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
23-40-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 8 0 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 23-40-04A Service Interphone Jack
Alternate procedures must be established and used by each airline when the use of the inoperative
jack(s) is (are) needed.
23-51-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
23-51-02 Boomset
Applicable to: ALL
23-51-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 1 No
a) Headset Function
One Headset function may be inoperative on any boom set provided alternate headset is
installed, operative and used, when there is an Observer on board.
b) Mike Function
Mike function may be inoperative provided:
1) DFDR operates normally, and
2) Associated hand mike operates normally, and
23-51-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 Yes
23-51-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
Only F/O loudspeaker may be inoperative provided that at least one crewmember on
cockpit duty wears a boomset compatible with the quick donning oxygen mask.
23-51-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
(o) One may be inoperative provided that the affected crewmember on cockpit duty wears a
boomset compatible with the quick donning oxygen mask.
Reference(s)
(o) Refer to OpsProc 23-51-05A Cockpit Loudspeaker Volume Control
Alternate procedures for monitoring communications during the flight must be established by
each airline.
23-51-06B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(m) One or both may be inoperative in the open position (non transmitting position) provided
that the INT/RAD sw on CAPT ACP, on F/O ACP and on ACP 3 are operative.
Note: Apply the maintenance procedure only when the inoperative sidestick PTT sw
is failed in the closed position (transmitting position).
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 23-51-00-040-001
23-52-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
23-52-02 ACP 3
Applicable to: ALL
23-52-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
23-52-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
23-52-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
23-52-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – Yes
23-52-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – Yes
23-52-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – 0 No
23-53-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
23-71-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 1 0 No
23-72-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D - - No
Cockpit Door Surveillance System may be inoperative provided:
1) Cockpit to cabin communication means operates normally, and
2) A code may be used to have unique identification for the persons outside the flight crew compartment
requesting to enter.
23-73-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
23-73-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
(o) One or more may be inoperative and affected passenger seat may be occupied provided that :
1) The passenger announcement can be heard throughout the cabin during the flight, and
2) The passenger address system is used to alert the passengers when "Return to Seat /
Fasten Seat Belt / No Smoking" signs are requested.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 23-73-02-01A Cabin DEU A
GENERAL INFORMATION
On the affected cabin area:
‐ general cabin illumination is set to full brightness,
‐ Passenger Call is not available,
‐ The (No Smoking/Fasten Seat Belt/No Portable Electric Device) Signs are not available.
IN FLIGHT
When return to seat is requested,
or
When seat belts should be fasten,
or
When smoking is prohibited,
or
When portable electric device use is prohibited,
Use the passenger address system to alert cabin attendants and passengers.
23-73-02-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the affected lavatory is closed and placarded
inoperative.
Issued Date: 22 Jun 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 02 Control Page: MI23 - 24
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 23 – COMMUNICATIONS
23-73-03-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 2 No
Alternate normal procedures and alternate emergency procedures must be established for the use of
one cabin handset per pair of floor level exit doors, if necessary.
Define the cabin handset location to be used by the purser, if necessary.
23-73-03-01B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 2 No
(o) One or more may be inoperative provided that:
1) One DEU B and the associated handset are operative at each pair of floor level exit doors, and
2) The slide bottle pressure and door bottle pressure associated with each affected DEU B are
checked on the associated direct reading pressure gauge before the first flight of each day, and
3) The associated lavatory fire extinguisher system is checked operative, and
4) The absence of smoke in the affected lavatory is periodically checked.
Refer to Item 25-62-06 Passenger Door Slide Pressure Message on the PTP/FAP *, and
Refer to Item 52-10-06 DOOR PRESS LOW/CHECK DOOR PRESSURE Message on the PTP/FAP*,
and
Refer to Item 26-17-01 Lavatory Smoke Detection System.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 23-73-03-01B Cabin DEU B
Alternate normal procedures and alternate emergency procedures must be established for the use of
one cabin handset per pair of floor level exit doors, if necessary.
Define the cabin handset location to be used by the purser, if necessary.
23-73-04-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
23-73-05-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
One or more may be inoperative provided that no seat is occupied from which a passenger
cannot hear a passenger announcement.
23-73-05-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
Alternate normal and alternate emergency procedures must be established and used by each airline
to alert the passenger in the lavatory, if necessary.
23-73-06-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that the cockpit audio control panel (ACP) is used for the
communication between the cockpit and the cabin.
23-73-06-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – Yes
(o) One or more may be inoperative provided that one handset is operative at each pair of floor level
exit doors.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 23-73-06-02A Cabin Handset
Alternate normal and emergency procedures must be established by each airline for the use of one
cabin handset per pair of floor level exit doors, if necessary
Define the location of the cabin handset to be used by the purser, if necessary.
One or more may be inoperative provided that the affected handset is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 23-73-06-02 Cabin Handset
23-73-07-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
23-73-08-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
23-73-09-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – 0 No
23-73-10-01B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the restrictions concerning lavatory smoke detection
system and cargo smoke detection system * are applied.
Refer to Item 26-17-01 Lavatory Smoke Detection System, and
Refer to Item 26-16-01 Smoke Detector in the FWD Cargo Compartment (if FWD cargo
compartment smoke detection system installed) and
Refer to Item 26-16-02 Smoke Detector in the AFT and the BULK Cargo Compartments (if
AFT cargo compartment smoke detection system installed).
Note: Failure of a single CIDS-SDF channel is indicated by a MAINTENANCE message
on the STATUS SD page.
Refer to Item 26-00-01 SDCU/SMOKE MAINTENANCE Message
23-74-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that associated Forward Attendant Panel functions are considered
inoperative.
Refer to Item 23-73-07-01 Prerecorded Announcement and Music Reproducer (PRAM) (If Installed),
And
Refer to Item 23-74-12 CIDS Caution Light of the Forward Attendant Panel, and
Refer to Item 23-74-13 Lighting Module of the Forward Attendant Panel
23-74-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that the safety related messages on the FAP are considered
inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-06 DOOR PRESS LOW/CHECK DOOR PRESSURE Message on the
PTP/FAP, and
Refer to Item 25-62-06 Passenger Door Slide Pressure Message on the PTP/FAP *, and
Refer to Item 25-62-07 Emergency Exit Slide Pressure Message on the PTP/FAP
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 23-74-01A FAP Display Unit
GENERAL INFORMATION
The cabin lighting may be dimmed through the Additional Attendant Panel (AAP) (If available).
23-74-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that associated Forward Attendant Panel functions are considered
inoperative.
Refer to Item 23-73-07-01 Prerecorded Announcement and Music Reproducer (PRAM) (If Installed),
And
Refer to Item 23-73-09-01 Emergency Cockpit Alerting System (ECAS), and
Refer to Item 23-74-12 CIDS Caution Light of the Forward Attendant Panel, and
Refer to Item 23-74-13 Lighting Module of the Forward Attendant Panel
23-74-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
23-74-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – 0 No
23-74-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that the display of the safety related messages on PTP are
considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-06 DOOR PRESS LOW/CHECK DOOR PRESSURE Message on the
PTP/FAP, and
Refer to Item 25-62-06 Passenger Door Slide Pressure Message on the PTP/FAP *, and
Refer to Item 25-62-07 Emergency Exit Slide Pressure Message on the PTP/FAP
23-74-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 52-10-06 DOOR PRESS LOW/CHECK DOOR PRESSURE Message on the PTP/FAP
23-74-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 52-10-06 DOOR PRESS LOW/CHECK DOOR PRESSURE Message on the PTP/FAP
23-74-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 25-62-06 Passenger Door Slide Pressure Message on the PTP/FAP *
Refer to Item 25-62-07 Emergency Exit Slide Pressure Message on the PTP/FAP
Note: Apply both MEL Items.
23-74-08 Slide Pressure Monitoring on the FAP
Applicable to: RP-C8989 AND RP-C8991
23-74-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 25-62-06 Passenger Door Slide Pressure Message on the PTP/FAP *
Refer to Item 25-62-07 Emergency Exit Slide Pressure Message on the PTP/FAP
Note: Apply both MEL Items.
23-74-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – 0 Yes
23-74-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – 0 Yes
One or more may be inoperative.
23-74-11A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – 0 Yes
23-74-12A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that PTP messages are checked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 23-74-12A CIDS Caution Light of the Forward Attendant Panel
ON GROUND
If the DOOR PRESS LOW message* is displayed on the PTP status page:
Refer to Item 52-10-06 DOOR PRESS LOW/CHECK DOOR PRESSURE Message on the
PTP/FAP (If installed)
If the Passenger Door SLIDE PRESS LOW message* is displayed on the PTP status page:
Refer to Item 25-62-06 Passenger Door Slide Pressure Message on the PTP/FAP (If installed)
If the Emergency Exit SLIDE PRESS LOW message* is displayed on the PTP status page:
Refer to Item 25-62-07 Overwing Emergency Exit Slide Pressure Message on the PTP/FAP (If
installed)
23-74-13A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
General Information
The cabin lighting may be dimmed through the Additional Attendant Panel (AAP) (If available)
24-00-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
DC BUS TIE MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page.
24-00-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
AC GEN MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page.
24-01-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
One or both may be inoperative.
24-01-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
One or both may be inoperative.
24-01-01-03 GEN pb-sw FAULT light and APU GEN pb-sw FAULT light
Applicable to: ALL
24-01-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 1 Yes
One GEN pb-sw FAULT light and/or the APU GEN pb-sw FAULT light may be inoperative
provided that the associated generator indications are operative on the ELEC SD page.
24-01-01-04 GEN pb-sw OFF light and APU GEN pb-sw OFF light
Applicable to: ALL
24-01-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 Yes
One or more may be inoperative.
24-01-01-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that the AC ESS bus indication is operative on the ELEC SD
page.
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: MI24 - 4
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 24 – ELECTRICAL POWER
24-01-01-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that the AC ESS bus indication is operative on the ELEC SD
page.
24-01-01-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 24-01-01-07A EXT PWR pb-sw AVAIL light
BEFORE PUSHBACK
Confirm the external power disconnection either on the ELEC SD page or with the ground crew.
PARKING
If the APU is not available:
‐ EXT PWR pb-sw.................................................................................................................... ON
‐ Confirm the external power connection either on the ELEC SD page or with the ground crew
before engine shutdown.
24-01-01-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
24-01-01-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that:
1) For each generator, the AC load indication is operative on the ELEC SD page, and
2) The GALY & CAB automatic load shed system is checked operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 24-01-01-09A GALY & CAB pb-sw FAULT light
24-01-01-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that:
1) For each generator, the AC load indication is operative on the ELEC SD page, and
2) The galley automatic load shed system is checked operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 24-01-01-09A GALLEY pb-sw FAULT light
24-01-01-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
24-01-01-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
24-01-01-11A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
24-01-01-12A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
24-01-01-13A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
One may be inoperative provided that the frequency and the temperature indications of the
affected generator are operative on the ELEC SD page.
24-01-02-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
B 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
24-07-01A
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 24-07-01A AC Generation Indications on the ELEC SD page
24-07-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
One or more indications related to the DC generation may be inoperative.
24-07-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be displayed.
24-09-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) May be displayed provided that:
1) The alert is confirmed to be false by troubleshooting, and
2) The AC ESS BUS SHED is checked operative before each flight, and
3) HF 1 is deactivated.
Refer to Item 23-10-01 HF System
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 24-09-01A ELEC AC ESS BUS SHED Alert
GENERAL INFORMATION
When the ELEC AC ESS BUS SHED alert is displayed on the EWD:
‐ The AC ESS BUS SHED message may appear on the ELEC SD page,
‐ The CAPT AOA message may be displayed in the INOP SYS column on the STATUS SD page,
‐ The ELEC/AC BUS/8XP/MONG (49VU H11) C/B may trip.
IN FLIGHT
If either the ANTI ICE F/O AOA alert or the ANTI ICE F/O PROBES alert is displayed on the
EWD, and icing conditions cannot be avoided:
‐ ADR 2 pb-sw........................................................................................................................ OFF
‐ AIR DATA sw..................................................................................................................... F/O 3
Note: If the ADR 2 pb-sw is set to OFF, takeoff in CONF 1+F is not permitted.
If either the ANTI ICE STBY AOA alert or the ANTI ICE STBY PROBES alert is displayed on
the EWD, and icing conditions cannot be avoided:
ADR 3 pb-sw.............................................................................................................................OFF
24-09-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(m) May be displayed provided that the alert is confirmed to be false by troubleshooting.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 24-50-00-040-001
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
APU fuel consumption with APU GEN pb-sw On:
FL GND 200 250 300 335 390
KG/H 100 63 57 54 49 42
LB/H 220 139 126 119 108 93
Note: When the External Power is disconnected, the IFE is lost until the APU supplies the
electrical network.
CAUTION For economical reason, the IDG should not operate for more than 50 flight hours in
the disconnected mode.
IN FLIGHT
If the SMOKE/FUMES/AVNCS SMOKE QRH’s procedure is applied
o If the GEN 1 is inoperative:
When the GEN 2 is set to OFF, the aircraft reverts to the ELEC EMER configuration.
Apply the ELEC EMER CONFIG procedure of the SMOKE/FUMES/AVNCS SMOKE
QRH’s procedure.
(m) Refer to AMM 24-20-00-040-001
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
APU fuel consumption with APU GEN pb-sw On:
Note: When the External Power is disconnected, the IFE is lost until the APU supplies the
electrical network.
CAUTION For economical reason, the IDG should not operate for more than 50 flight hours
in the disconnected mode.
(m) Refer to AMM 24-20-00-040-001
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
APU fuel consumption with APU GEN pb-sw On:
IN FLIGHT
If the SMOKE/FUMES/AVNCS SMOKE QRH’s procedure is applied
o If the GEN 1 is inoperative:
When the GEN 2 is set to OFF, the aircraft reverts to the ELEC EMER configuration.
Apply the ELEC EMER CONFIG procedure of the SMOKE/FUMES/AVNCS SMOKE
QRH’s procedure.
(m) Refer to AMM 24-20-00-040-001
24-22-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
(o) (m) One may be inoperative provided that:
1) ETOPS is not conducted, and
2) The flight altitude is limited to 33 500 ft, and
3) The APU and AC auxiliary generation are operative and used throughout the flight, and
4) The APU fuel pump is operative, and
5) The APU oil consumption is checked adequate for the intended flight, and
6) The fuel recirculation system associated with the operative IDG is checked operative
before each flight, and
7) All busses have power, and
8) The indications and alerts for the remaining AC main generation and the AC auxiliary
generation are operative, and
9) The galley automatic load shed system is checked operative, and
10) When the AC main generation 1 is inoperative, the AC ESS FEED manual transfer is
checked operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 24-22-01A AC Main Generation (IDG, GCU, Line Contactor)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
APU fuel consumption with APU GEN pb-sw On:
FL GND 200 250 300 335 390
KG/H 100 63 57 54 49 42
LB/H 220 139 126 119 108 93
Note: When the External Power is disconnected, the IFE is lost until the APU supplies the
electrical network.
‐ Supply the electrical network from the APU or the external power.
‐ GALY & CAB pb-sw.................................................................................................................AUTO
‐ ELEC/GALY & CAB/GND/FLT/LOGIC (122VU S24) C/B............................................................Pull
‐ Check that a part of the operative galley equipment does not operate.
‐ ELEC/GALY & CAB/GND/FLT/LOGIC (122VU S24) C/B..........................................................Push
CAUTION For economical reason, the IDG should not operate for more than 50 flight hours in
the disconnected mode.
IN FLIGHT
When the AC main generation 1 is inoperative:
o In the case of failure of the AC BUS 1:
AC ESS FEED pb-sw.......................................................................................................ALTN
24-22-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
Note: When the GPCU and the APU Generator are both inoperative, the engines cannot be
started.
24-23-01A Non ETOPS flight and APU GEN pb-sw set to OFF
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that:
1) ETOPS is not conducted, and
2) The APU GEN pb-sw is set to OFF.
24-23-01B ETOPS 120 min flight and APU GEN pb-sw set to OFF
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative for four flights provided that:
1) ETOPS beyond 120 min is not conducted, and
2) The APU GEN pb-sw is set to OFF.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM task
24-24-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
24-24-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(m) May be inoperative provided that:
1) ETOPS is not conducted, and
2) The RAT extension manual control is checked operative every day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 24-20-00-040-002
24-24-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
B 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that ETOPS is not conducted.
24-25-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that:
1) The AC ESS FEED pb-sw is set to NORM, and
2) It is checked on the ELEC SD page that the AC BUS 1 supplies the AC ESS BUS, and
3) The TR 2 is operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 24-25-01A Manual Transfer to the AC BUS 2 (ALTN Function)
24-25-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8897, RP-C8989, RP-C8991, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and
RP-C8996
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 24-56-00-040-001
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 24-56-00-040-001
24-26-02 GALY & CAB Manual Load Shed System (GALY & CAB pb-sw)
Applicable to: RP-C8990
24-26-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(m) May be inoperative provided that all GALY & CAB loads are disconnected.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 24-56-00-040-003
24-26-02 GALY & CAB Manual Load Shed System (GALY & CAB pb-sw)
Applicable to: RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8989 AND RP-C8991
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 24-56-00-040-002
(o) (m) May be inoperative provided that the COMMERCIAL supply system is checked operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 24-26-02B Galley Manual Load Shed System (GALLEY/GALY & CAB pb-sw)
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
If the AVNCS SMOKE emergency procedure is applied or if the AVIONICS SMOKE alert
is displayed on the EWD replace the action to set the GALY & CAB pb-sw to OFF by the
following actions:
‐ EMER EXIT LT selector............................................................................................As required
‐ COMMERCIAL pb-sw...........................................................................................................OFF
Note: When the COMMERCIAL pb-sw is set to OFF, the normal cabin lighting goes off.
Minimum cabin lighting is recovered when the EMER EXIT LT selector is set to ON.
24-26-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(m) May be inoperative provided that all galley loads are disconnected.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 24-56-00-040-003
24-26-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 24-26-03A Commercial Supply System
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
If the AVNCS SMOKE emergency procedure is applied or if the AVIONICS SMOKE alert
is displayed on the EWD replace the action to set the COMMERCIAL pb-sw to OFF by the
following actions:
‐ BUS TIE pb.......................................................................................................................... OFF
‐ GEN 2 pb-sw........................................................................................................................OFF
The F/O PFDU, the F/O NDU, and the ECAM lower display are lost.
If the smoke persists:
‐ GEN 2 pb-sw....................................................................................................................On
When the GEN 2 pb-sw is set to on, all the electrical busses are recovered but the TR 2
remains inoperative
‐ BUS TIE pb.................................................................................................................AUTO
Before the landing gear extension:
‐ GEN 2 pb-sw.......................................................................................................................... On
When the GEN 2 pb-sw is set to on, all the electrical busses are recovered but the TR 2
remains inoperative
‐ BUS TIE pb........................................................................................................................AUTO
24-28-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
Must be operative.
24-32-01A TR 1 Inoperative
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 24-32-01A DC Main Generation (TR 1 inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
24-32-01B TR 2 Inoperative
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
(o) (m) TR 2 may be inoperative provided that:
1) ETOPS is not conducted, and
2) The AC ESS FEED control is checked operative every day, and
3) The standby IAS indicator is operative, and
4) The standby altimeter is operative, and
5) The standby horizon is operative, and
6) The standby compass is operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 24-32-01B DC Main Generation (TR 2 inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
24-32-01A TR 1 Inoperative
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
24-32-01B TR 2 inoperative
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the AC BUS 2, all DUs are lost. In this case:
AC ESS FEED pb-sw..............................................................................................................Norm
In the case of failure of the AC BUS 1:
RAT MAN ON pb-sw (on HYD overhead panel)........................................................................Set
24-34-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
24-35-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
One may be inoperative in the open position.
24-35-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
24-38-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 2 2 No
Must be operative.
24-38-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 2 1 No
(o) (m) One may be inoperative for 10 flights provided that:
1) ETOPS is not conducted, and
2) No APU start is attempted neither on ground nor in flight, and
3) Both AC main generations are operative, and
4) The refueling is made with an external power unit connected, and
5) The battery associated with the inoperative BCL is charged before each flight.
Reference(s)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Do not use the APU.
Use a ground power unit to start the engines on ground.
24-38-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated voltage indication is operative
on the ELEC SD page.
24-41-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
Note: When the GPCU and the APU Generator are both inoperative, the engines cannot
be started.
24-41-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(m) May be inoperative provided that the receptacle is placarded inoperative and not used.
Note: When the GPCU and the APU Generator are both inoperative, the engines cannot
be started.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 24-41-00-040-001
MI-25-40 Lavatories
25-40-01 Toilet Waste Compartment Flapper Door
25-40-02 Exterior Lavatory Ashtray
25-40-03 Interior Lavatory Ashtray
Note: The correct indication may be recovered by performing the AMM task 52-70-00-040-007.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
25-07-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 No
(o) One or more may be permanently indicated in the armed position provided that the associated slide
is visually checked to be armed before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 25-07-01A Passenger Door/Cabin Passenger Door - Emergency Exit
Slide Permanently Indicated Armed on the DOOR/OXY SD page
ON GROUND
Cabin crew must confirm before each flight that the associated slide is armed.
Note: The correct indication may be recovered by performing the AMM task 52-70-00-040-007.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
(o) One or more may be permanently indicated in the not armed position provided that:
1) The aircraft is not operated at night, and
2) The associated slide is visually checked to be armed before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 25-07-02A Passenger Door/Cabin Passenger Door - Emergency Exit
Slide Permanently Indicated Not Armed on the DOOR/OXY SD page
ON GROUND
Cabin crew must confirm before each flight that the associated slide is armed.
Note: The correct indication may be recovered by performing the AMM task 52-70-00-040-007.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
25-07-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(m) One or both may be permanently indicated in the armed position provided that the
associated slide is visually checked to be armed before the first flight of the day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 52-70-00-040-008
Note: The correct indication may be recovered by performing the AMM task 52-70-00-040-007.
____________________________________________________________________________________
(m) One or both may be permanently indicated in the not armed position provided that:
1) The aircraft is not operated at night, and
2) The associated slide is visually checked to be armed before the first flight of the day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 52-70-00-040-009
One or both may be permanently indicated in the not armed position provided that both
overwing emergency exits on the same side are considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
Note: The correct indication may be recovered by performing the AMM task 52-70-00-040-007.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
(m) One or both may be permanently indicated in the not armed position provided that:
1) The aircraft is not operated at night, and
2) The associated slide is visually checked to be armed before the first flight of the day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 52-70-00-040-009
One or both may be permanently indicated in not armed position provided that the associated
overwing emergency exit is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
25-11-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 2 2 No
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated electrical control is operative.
One or both may be inoperative provided that the seating position is acceptable to the affected
crewmember.
25-11-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(m) One or both may be inoperative provided that the seat is secured in an upright position
acceptable to the affected crewmember.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 25-11-00-040-001
25-11-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the seating position is acceptable to the
affected crewmember.
25-11-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(m) One or both may be inoperative provided that the electrical adjustment of the associated
seat is deactivated.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 25-11-00-040-002
25-11-06 Pilot Seat Shoulder Harness
Applicable to: ALL
25-11-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 2 1 No
BEFORE TAKEOFF
The takeoff briefing should include the status of the affected seat and the position to be adopted by
the F/O in the case of RTO.
To cope with any potential RTO:
The F/O must tightly fasten operative harness strap.
DURING FLIGHT
For any phase of flight in turbulence atmosphere:
The F/O must fasten the belts accordingly.
BEFORE LANDING
The landing briefing should include the status of the affected seat and the position to be adopted by
the F/O in the case of high deceleration at landing.
To cope with any potential high deceleration at landing:
The F/O must tightly fasten operative harness straps
25-11-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 2 0 No
25-11-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated armrest position is acceptable
to the affected crewmember.
25-11-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated armrest position is acceptable
to the affected crewmember.
25-11-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
25-11-11A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
25-11-12A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 2 0 No
25-12-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the seat is not occupied during takeoff and landing.
25-12-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
25-12-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 25-12-04A Third Occupant Seat Fifth Strap
DURING FLIGHT
To cope with any potential turbulence situation:
The third occupant must tightly fasten the operative harness straps.
25-12-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the seat is not occupied during takeoff and landing.
25-12-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that:
1) The seat is placarded inoperative, and
2) The seat is not occupied.
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: MI25 - 10
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 25 – EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS
25-12-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 25-12-08A Fourth Occupant Seat Fifth Strap
DURING FLIGHT
To cope with any potential turbulence situation:
The fourth occupant must tightly fasten the operative harness straps.
25-20-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D - - Yes
Recline mechanism may be inoperative and seat occupied provided seat is secured in the up-right
position.
(o) (m) One or more non-required cabin attendant seats may be inoperative or not usable provided
that the affected seat is secured in its stowed position or removed.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 25-20-03A Cabin Attendant Seat
(o) (m) One required cabin attendant seat may be inoperative or not usable provided that:
1) The cabin attendant assigned to affected seat occupies a passenger seat as close to or
closer than nearest seated passenger to the associated exit, and
2) The passenger seat to be used by cabin attendant is correctly placarded, and
3) The cabin attendant can reach assigned exit and emergency equipment in nearly the
same time as from normally assigned seat, and
4) The direct view of passenger cabin by flight attendants is not impaired, and
5) The alternate procedures are established for displaced flight attendant according to
national regulations, and
6) The affected seat is secured in its stowed position or removed.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 25-20-03B Cabin Attendant Seat
1. All required announcements which are made while the Cabin Attendant is seated shall be
made by the Cabin Attendant who has access to the P.A. from a seated position.
2. All exit responsibilities shall remain the same. This includes normal operation duties and
emergency evacuation duties.
3. The flight crew shall be notified of the location of the Displaced Cabin Attendant
25-35-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
25-40 – Lavatories
25-40-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
25-40-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – 0 Yes
One or more may be damaged or missing provided that the flight is non-smoking.
One or more may be damaged or missing provided that the associated lavatory is locked
closed and placarded inoperative.
25-50-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - No
25-50-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
One or more may be damaged or missing provided that the associated cargo compartment
is empty or does not contain flammable or combustible materials.
One or more may be damaged provided that the associated cargo compartment is empty or
does not contain flammable or combustible materials.
One or more may be missing provided that the associated cargo compartment is empty.
25-50-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated door is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-01 Cabin Passenger Door
(m) One or more may be removed provided that the associated door is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-01 Cabin Passenger Door
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 52-10-00-040-001
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated overwing emergency exit is considered
inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
Note: When an overwing escape slide is inoperative, both emergency exits on the same
side are considered inoperative.
(m) One or both may be removed provided that the associated overwing emergency exit is considered
inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
Note: When an overwing escape slide is inoperative, both emergency exits on the same
side are considered inoperative.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 25-62-00-040-006
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated overwing emergency exit is considered
inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
25-62-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 6 0 Yes
25-62-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 4 0 No
25-62-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 4 0 No
(m) One or more messages may be displayed provided that the slide bottle pressure is
checked before the first MEL dispatch and then every 600 flight hours or every 4 months,
whichever occurs first.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 25-62-00-040-008
25-62-06 Passenger Door CHECK SLIDE PRESSURE
Message on Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) *
Applicable to: RP-C8989 AND RP-C8991
25-62-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 4 0 No
(m) One or more messages may be displayed provided that the slide bottle pressure is
checked before the first MEL dispatch and then every 600 flight hours or every 4 months,
whichever occurs first.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 25-62-00-040-009
(m) One or both messages may be displayed provided that the associated slide bottle pressure
is checked before the first flight of each day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 25-62-00-040-001
One or both messages may be displayed provided that both overwing emergency exits on the same
side are considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
(m) One or both messages may be displayed provided that the associated slide bottle pressure
is checked before the first flight of each day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 25-62-00-040-001
One or both messages may be displayed provided that the associated overwing emergency exit is
considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
(m) One or both messages may be displayed provided that the associated slide bottle pressure
is checked before the first flight of each day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 25-62-00-040-005
One or both messages may be displayed provided that both overwing emergency exits on the same
side are considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
One or more may be inoperative or missing provided that the associated overwing emergency exit is
considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
One or more may be inoperative or missing provided that extended overwater flight is not conducted.
One or both may be inoperative or missing provided that the associated overwing emergency exit is
considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
One or both may be inoperative or missing provided that extended overwater flight is not conducted.
25-63-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 25-63-01A Emergency Evacuation Signaling System (COMMAND pb-sw,
HORN SHUT OFF pb, CAPT&PURS and CAPT sw) *
GENERAL INFORMATION
If necessary, the information will be given through the passenger address system or the cabin
interphone system.
FOR A320
25-64-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 3 3 No
FOR A319
25-64-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
Reference Regulation: PCAR Part 7.8.11
25-64-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
25-64-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – 0 No
25-65-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 2 0 No
1. May be inoperative or missing provided that aircraft is for daylight operation only
2 Can be dispatched for night operation provided the crewmember assigned to associated seat has
a flashlight that is in good working order readily available for his use
25-65-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 4 0 No
May be inoperative or missing provided crewmember assigned to associated seat has a flashlight
that is in good working order readily available for his use
25-65-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
25-65-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
25-65-06 Megaphone
Applicable to: ALL
25-65-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
25-66-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D - - No
25-66-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Reference Regulation: PCAR Part 7.8.17
Not Applicable due to Zest Air does not operate in “Extended over-water operations”
26-00-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
26-00-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
26-01-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 16 8 No
A maximum of four bulbs or LEDs may be inoperative in each ENG FIRE-PUSH pb-sw.
(m) One may be inoperative on each engine provided that the associated fire extinguisher bottle is
checked before the first flight of each day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 26-21-00-040-001
(m) Both may be inoperative on one engine for four flights or 15 flight hours, whichever occurs
first, provided that the associated fire extinguisher bottles are checked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 26-21-00-040-001
26-01-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 Yes
(m) One or more may be inoperative provided that the engine extinguishing system firing circuit
is checked operative before the first flight of each day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 26-21-00-040-003
(m) May be inoperative provided that the APU fire extinguisher bottle is checked before the first flight
of each day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 26-22-00-040-004
(m) May be inoperative provided that the APU extinguishing system firing circuit is checked
operative before the first flight of each day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 26-22-00-040-005
26-01-01-31A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
(m) One may be inoperative provided that the associated engine fire extinguishing and detection
systems are checked operative before the first flight of each day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 26-21-00-040-002
(m) May be inoperative provided that the APU extinguishing system firing circuit and the bottle
low pressure detection system are checked operative before the first flight of each day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 26-22-00-040-012
26-01-01-33A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
26-01-01-34A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(m) May be inoperative provided that the associated bottle weight is checked before the first
flight of each day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 26-23-00-040-001
26-01-02-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
26-12-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
26-12-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
26-12-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the engine fire test is made before each flight.
26-12-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
26-12-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
26-15-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
Disregard the BLOWER pb-sw FAULT light and the CAB FANS pb-sw FAULT light illuminated on the
VENTILATION overhead panel.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of an electrical smoke:
Apply the AVNCS SMOKE emergency procedure. Refer to QRH/ABN-26-Fire
Protection-A.SMOKE/FUMES/AVNCS SMOKE.
Both detectors in the cavity may be inoperative provided that the FWD cargo compartment is empty.
Both detectors in the cavity may be inoperative provided that ETOPS is not conducted.
Note: 1. The cargo smoke detection function is part of the CIDS Smoke Detection Function (CIDS-SDF).
Refer to Item 23-73-10-01 Smoke Detection Function (CIDS-SDF)
2. Failure of a single detector in the cavity is indicated by a MAINTENANCE message on
the STATUS SD page.
Refer to Item 26-00-01 SDCU/SMOKE MAINTENANCE Message
3. Depending on applicable regulation, smoke detection system may be required for
dispatch.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Both detectors in the cavity may be inoperative provided that the liner integrity in the FWD
cargo compartment is checked before each flight.
26-16-02 Smoke Detector in the AFT and the BULK Cargo Compartments
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
_______________________________________________________________________________
Both detectors in one or both cavities may be inoperative provided that the AFT and the
BULK cargo compartments are empty or do not contain flammable or combustible materials.
Both detectors in one or both cavities may be inoperative provided that ETOPS is not conducted.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
For live animal transportation, use the Live Animal Transportation Calculation Tool.
DURING COCKPIT PREPARATION
AFT ISOL VALVE pb-sw.................................................................................................................OFF
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
For live animal transportation, use the Live Animal Transportation Calculation Tool.
DURING COCKPIT PREPARATION
AFT ISOL VALVE pb-sw.................................................................................................................OFF
26-16-02 Smoke Detector in the AFT and the BULK Cargo Compartments
Applicable to: RP-C8989 AND RP-C8991
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Note: 1. The cargo smoke detection function is part of the CIDS Smoke Detection Function
(CIDS-SDF).
Refer to Item 23-73-10-01 Smoke Detection Function (CIDS-SDF)
2. Failure of a single detector in the cavity is indicated by a MAINTENANCE message on
the STATUS SD page.
Refer to Item 26-00-01 SDCU/SMOKE MAINTENANCE Message
3. Depending on applicable regulation, smoke detection system may be required for dispatch.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Both detectors in one or both cavities may be inoperative provided that the AFT and the
BULK cargo compartments are empty or do not contain flammable or combustible materials.
Both detectors in one or both cavities may be inoperative provided that ETOPS is not conducted.
Both detectors in one or both cavities may be inoperative provided that the liner integrity in
the AFT and the BULK cargo compartments is checked before each flight.
Note: The lavatory smoke detection function is part of CIDS Smoke Detection Function (CIDS-SDF).
Refer to Item 23-73-10-01 Smoke Detection Function (CIDS-SDF)
________________________________________________________________________________________
26-17-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
26-17-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the lavatory smoke detection system is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 26-17-01 Lavatory Smoke Detection System
May be inoperative provided that the APU condition is continuously monitored in the cockpit
during APU operations on ground .
(m) May be damaged or missing provided that the APU fire extinguisher bottle pressure switch
is checked operative before the first flight of each day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 26-22-00-040-007
26-22-02B APU deactivated
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(m) One may be inoperative provided that the remaining squib is checked operative before the
first flight of each day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 26-22-00-040-008
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: MI26 - 20
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 26 – FIRE PROTECTION
26-22-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
26-22-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the APU automatic fire extinguishing control on ground is
considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 26-22-01 APU Automatic Fire Extinguishing Control on Ground
(m) May be inoperative provided that the APU automatic fire extinguishing control on ground is
checked operative.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 26-22-00-040-010
May be inoperative provided that the APU automatic fire extinguishing control on ground is
considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 26-22-01 APU Automatic Fire Extinguishing Control on Ground
(m) May be inoperative provided that the APU automatic fire extinguishing control on ground is
checked operative.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 26-22-00-040-011
May be inoperative provided that the APU automatic fire extinguishing control on ground is
considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 26-22-01 APU Automatic Fire Extinguishing Control on Ground
May be inoperative provided that the cargo compartments are empty or do not contain
flammable or combustible materials.
May be inoperative provided that the liner integrity in the cargo compartments is checked
before each flight.
One or both may be inoperative provided that the cargo compartments are empty or do not
contain flammable or combustible materials.
One or both may be inoperative provided that the liner integrity in the cargo compartments
is checked before each flight.
Note: The cargo smoke detection function is part of CIDS Smoke Detection Function (CIDS-SDF).
Refer to Item 23-73-10-01 Smoke Detection Function (CIDS-SDF)
________________________________________________________________________________________
May be inoperative provided that the cargo compartments are empty or do not contain
flammable or combustible materials.
May be inoperative provided that the liner integrity in the cargo compartments is checked
before each flight.
Note: The cargo smoke detection function is part of CIDS Smoke Detection Function (CIDS-SDF).
Refer to Item 23-73-10-01 Smoke Detection Function (CIDS-SDF)
_____________________________________________________________________________________
One or both may be inoperative provided that the cargo compartments are empty or do not
contain flammable or combustible materials.
One or both may be inoperative provided that the liner integrity in the cargo compartments
is checked before each flight.
One or both may be inoperative provided that the liner integrity in the associated cargo
compartment is checked before each flight.
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated cargo compartment is empty
or does not contain flammable or combustible materials.
One or both may be inoperative provided that the liner integrity in the associated cargo
compartment is checked before each flight.
26-24-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 4 3 No
Any in excess of those required by regulations may be inoperative or missing provided:
1) Inoperative fire extinguisher is tagged inoperative, removed from installed location, and placed
out of sight so it cannot be mistaken for a functional unit, and
26-25-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
MI-27-92 Electrical Flight Control System (EFCS) Control Inputs and Power Supply
27-92-01 Speedbrake Control System
27-92-02 Ground Spoiler Control System
27-92-03 SIDESTICK PRIORITY light
27-92-04 Sidestick Dual Input Visual Warnings
27-92-05 Sidestick Dual Input Aural W arning
27-00-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
F/CTL MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page.
27-00-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
SFCS MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page.
27-01-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
One may be inoperative.
27-01-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
One or both may be inoperative.
27-01-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 Yes
One may be inoperative.
27-01-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 Yes
One or more may be inoperative.
27-07-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 No
One or more may be inoperative.
27-07-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(o) One or more may be inoperative provided that the deflection of the affected aileron through
each servo-control is visually checked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-07-02A Aileron Position Indication on the F/CTL SD page
CAUTION If the expected aileron movement does not occur, do not attempt any reset.
Contact the maintenance.
CAUTION If the expected aileron movement does not occur, do not attempt any reset.
Contact the maintenance.
27-07-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 No
One or more may be inoperative.
27-07-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(o) One or both may be inoperative provided that the deflection of the affected elevator is
visually checked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-07-04A Elevator Position Indication on the F/CTL SD page
27-07-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative provided that the pitch trim handwheel and the stabilizer are visually
checked to synchronously operate before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-07-05A Pitch Trim Position Indication on the F/CTL SD page
27-07-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
27-07-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative.
27-07-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 No
One or more may be inoperative.
27-07-11A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 10 0 No
(o) One or more may be inoperative provided that the deflection of the affected surface is
visually checked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-07-11A Spoilers/Speedbrakes Indication on the F/CTL SD page
27-07-12A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 10 0 No
(o) One or more may be inoperative provided that the deflection of the affected surface is
visually checked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-07-12A Spoilers/Speedbrakes Indication on the WHEEL SD page
27-08-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
27-08-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
27-14-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-14-01A Left Aileron Blue Servo-Control (Controlled by ELAC 1)
27-14-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(m) May be inoperative provided that:
1) It is electrically disconnected, and
2) It remains mechanically connected and hydraulically supplied (damping function is not
affected), and
3) All roll spoilers are operative.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 27-14-00-040-001
27-14-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) (m) May be inoperative provided that:
1) It is electrically disconnected, and
2) It remains mechanically connected and hydraulically supplied (damping function is not
affected), and
3) The right aileron blue servo-control (controlled by ELAC 2) is operative, and
4) The left aileron green servo-control (controlled by ELAC 2) is operative, and
5) All roll spoilers are operative, and
6) The TR 1 and TR 2 are operative, and
7) The DC TIE contactor 1PC1 is checked closed.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-14-03A Right Aileron Green Servo-Control (Controlled by ELAC 1)
27-14-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(m) May be inoperative provided that:
1) It is electrically disconnected, and
2) It remains mechanically connected and hydraulically supplied (damping function is not
affected), and
3) All roll spoilers are operative.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 27-14-00-040-001
27-21-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(o) One or both may be inoperative provided that:
1) The rudder pedals can be secured in a position which meets individual pilot
requirements, and
2) The full and unrestricted movement of the rudder pedals and brake pedals deflection is
possible at both pilot stations.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-21-01A Rudder Pedal Adjustment System
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-22-01A Rudder Trim System
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-22-01B Rudder Trim System
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
27-22-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that one rudder trim position indication is operative.
27-22-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
27-23-01 Rudder Travel Limiter System (Including Rudder and Pedals Travel Limiter Units)
Applicable to: ALL
27-23-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
One may be inoperative.
27-34-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 4 4 No
All must be operative.
27-34-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 4 No
(m) One transducer per servo-control must be operative.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 27-34-00-040-001
27-40-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-51-01A SFCC Flap Channel
GENERAL INFORMATION
ENG 2 APPR IDLE ONLY message is displayed on the STATUS SD page.
FLAPS SLOW message is displayed on the STATUS SD page.
27-51-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
(o) (m) SFCC 2 slap channel may be inoperative provided that:
1) It is deactivated, and
2) The slats and flaps are checked operative on SFCC 1, and
3) The SFCC 1 slat WTB is checked operative before each flight, and
4) All ELACs, SECs, LGCIUs, RAs, FACs and ADIRS are operative, and
5) Takeoff is not performed in CONF 1+F.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-51-02A SFCC Slat Channel
GENERAL INFORMATION
SLATS SLOW message is displayed on the STATUS SD page.
27-51-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 2 No
(m) One or two solenoids associated with the SFCC 2 may be inoperative provided that the
SFCC 1 flap WTB is checked operative before each flight.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 27-51-00-040-004
27-54-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
The valve block associated with SFCC 2 may be inoperative provided that the SFCC 2 flap
channel is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 27-51-01 SFCC Flap Channel
27-54-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 2 2 No
Both must be operative.
27-64-01 Spoiler 5
Applicable to: ALL
27-64-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(o) (m) The pair of spoilers 5 may be inoperative provided that:
1) The affected spoiler is deactivated in the retracted position, and
2) The pairs of spoilers 1, 2, 3, and 4 are operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-64-01A Spoiler 5
27-64-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 2 No
(o) (m) One pair of spoilers 1 or 3 may be inoperative provided that:
1) The affected spoiler is deactivated in the retracted position, and
2) The pairs of spoilers 2, 4, and 5 are operative, and
3) The Flight Manual performance penalties are applied.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-64-02A Spoiler 1 or 3
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The following penalties may be used for takeoff and landing performance determination if no takeoff
and landing data (predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program with
present failure case) is available.
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
The speeds determined without failure and associated with the actual TOW may be retained
provided they are all lower than the speeds calculated using above method.
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCG limitation).
FOR TAKEOFF
If the above method was used for takeoff performance determination:
Perform the takeoff using full thrust (TOGA).
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The following penalties may be used for takeoff and landing performance determination if no takeoff
and landing data (predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program with
present failure case) is available.
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
The speeds determined without failure and associated with the actual TOW may be retained
provided they are all lower than the speeds calculated using above method.
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCG limitation).
FOR TAKEOFF
If the above method was used for takeoff performance determination:
Perform the takeoff using full thrust (TOGA).
(m) Refer to AMM 27-64-00-040-001
27-64-03 Spoiler 2 or 4
Applicable to: ALL
27-64-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 2 No
(o) (m) One pair of spoilers 2 or 4 may be inoperative in the retracted position provided that:
1) The affected spoiler is deactivated in the retracted position, and
2) The pairs of spoilers 1, 3, and 5 are operative, and
3) The SFCC 2 flap channel is operative, and
4) The Flight Manual performance penalties are applied.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-64-03A Spoiler 2 or 4
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
For performance penalties, Refer to OpsProc 27-64-02A Spoiler 1 or 3
27-64-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 No
(o) (m) The pairs of spoilers 1 and 2 may be inoperative in the retracted position provided that:
1) The affected spoilers are deactivated in the retracted position, and
2) The pairs of spoilers 3, 4, and 5 are operative, and
3) The SFCC 2 flap channel is operative, and
4) The Flight Manual performance penalties are applied.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-64-04A Spoilers 1 and 2
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The following penalties may be used for takeoff and landing performance determination if no takeoff
and landing data (predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program with
present failure case) is available.
WARNING ‐ Do not use this method with takeoff charts computed with other conditions.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff with tailwind.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff on wet or contaminated runways.
How to proceed ?
‐ Read, in 0 kt wind column of the takeoff chart computed in normal condition, the MTOW
and associated speeds (V1, VR, V2) corresponding to the actual temperature, even in the
case of headwind (the method does not take into account the headwind benefit on takeoff
performance).
‐ Apply the QNH and/or bleed corrections, if any, to determine the MTOW.
‐ Enter the following table to determine the MTOW and speed decrements.
‐ Applying these decrements, calculate the MTOW and associated speeds corresponding to the
actual temperature.
DECREMENTS (ΔW, ΔV1, ΔVR, ΔV2) WHEN TWO PAIRS OF SPOILERS ARE INOPERATIVE
RUNWAY CONFIGURATION
LENGTH 1+F 2 3
(m) ΔW (kg/lb) ΔV1 ΔVR ΔV2 ΔW (kg/lb) ΔV1 ΔVR ΔV2 ΔW (kg/lb) ΔV1 ΔVR ΔV2
(kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt)
1 500 1 400/3 000 3 1 1 800/1 700 3 2 2 1 000/2 200 4 3 3
2 000 800/1 700 2 1 1 1 000/2 200 3 2 2 1 000/2 200 3 2 2
2 500 800/1 700 2 1 1 1 000/2 200 3 2 2 800/1 700 3 2 2
3 000 1 200/2 600 4 3 3 1 000/2 200 3 2 2 1 000/2 200 4 3 3
3 500 1 200/2 600 4 3 3 1 200/2 600 4 3 3 1 000/2 200 4 3 3
4 000
and 1 200/2 600 4 3 3 1 400/3 000 4 4 4 800/1 700 4 2 2
above
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
The speeds determined without failure and associated with the actual TOW may be retained
provided that they are all lower than the speeds calculated using above method.
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCG limitation).
TAKEOFF
If the above method was used for takeoff performance computation:
Perform the takeoff using full thrust (TOGA).
IN FLIGHT
In the case of further failure of SEC 1 and SEC 2:
‐ Autoland is not permitted.
‐ Disengage the AP at 500 ft RA before landing in direct law. As soon as the AP is disengaged
when the three SECs are failed, it cannot be engaged again.
‐ Maximum landing capability is CAT 1
(m) Refer to AMM 27-64-00-040-001
Applicable to: RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995, RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8989 AND
RP-C8991
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The following penalties may be used for takeoff and landing performance determination if no takeoff
and landing data (predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program with
present failure case) is available.
WARNING ‐ Do not use this method with takeoff charts computed with other conditions.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff with tailwind.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff on wet or contaminated runways.
How to proceed ?
‐ Read, in 0 kt wind column of the takeoff chart computed in normal condition, the MTOW
and associated speeds (V1, VR, V2) corresponding to the actual temperature, even in the
case of headwind (the method does not take into account the headwind benefit on takeoff
performance).
‐ Apply the QNH and/or bleed corrections, if any, to determine the MTOW.
‐ Enter the following table to determine the MTOW and speed decrements.
‐ Applying these decrements, calculate the MTOW and associated speeds corresponding to the
actual temperature.
DECREMENTS (ΔW, ΔV1, ΔVR, ΔV2) WHEN TWO PAIRS OF SPOILERS ARE INOPERATIVE
CONFIGURATION
RUNWAY
1+F 2 3
LENGTH
ΔV1 ΔVR ΔV2 ΔV1 ΔVR ΔV2 ΔV1 ΔVR ΔV2
(m) ΔW (kg/lb) ΔW (kg/lb) ΔW (kg/lb)
(kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt)
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
The speeds determined without failure and associated with the actual TOW may be retained
provided that they are all lower than the speeds calculated using above method.
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCG limitation).
TAKEOFF
If the above method was used for takeoff performance computation:
Perform the takeoff using full thrust (TOGA).
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The following penalties may be used for takeoff and landing performance determination if no
takeoff and landing data (predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program
with present failure case) is available.
How to proceed ?
‐ Read, in 0 kt wind column of the takeoff chart computed in normal condition, the MTOW
and associated speeds (V1, VR, V2) corresponding to the actual temperature, even in the
case of headwind (the method does not take into account the headwind benefit on takeoff
performance).
‐ Apply the QNH and/or bleed corrections, if any, to determine the MTOW.
‐ Enter the following table to determine the MTOW and speed decrements.
‐ Applying these decrements, calculate the MTOW and associated speeds corresponding to
the actual temperature.
CAUTION Do not extrapolate below the shortest runway length provided by the table.
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
The speeds determined without failure and associated with the actual TOW may be
retained provided that they are all lower than the speeds calculated using above method.
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCG limitation).
If the corrected V1 is lower than the minimum V1:
Take this last value as V1.
Further decrease the weight by 3 000 kg (6 600 lb) per kt difference between both values.
Check that the corrected VR is equal to or above the minimum VR value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCA limitation).
If the corrected VR is lower than the minimum VR:
Takeoff cannot be performed using this method.
Check that the corrected V2 is equal to or above the minimum V2 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCA limitation).
If the corrected V2 is lower than the minimum V2:
Takeoff cannot be performed using this method.
Check that the corrected V2 is equal to or above the minimum V2 due to VMU limitation (Refer
to FCOM/PER-TOF-TOD-25-20 MINIMUM V2 LIMITED BY VMU/VMCA (KT IAS)).
If the corrected V2 is lower than the minimum V2:
Takeoff cannot be performed using this method.
27-64-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 No
(o) (m) The pairs of spoilers 3 and 4 may be inoperative in the retracted position provided that:
1) The affected spoilers are deactivated in the retracted position, and
2) The pairs of spoilers 1, 2, and 5 are operative, and
3) The TR 1 and TR 2 are operative, and
4) The DC TIE contactor 1PC1 is checked closed, and
5) The SFCC 2 flap channel is operative, and
6) The Flight Manual performance penalties are applied.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-64-05A Spoilers 3 and 4
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
For performance penalties Refer to OpsProc 27-64-04A Spoilers 1 and 2
IN FLIGHT
Do not use the speedbrakes.
27-81-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 2 No
(m) One or two solenoids associated with the SFCC 2 may be inoperative provided that the
SFCC 1 slat WTB is checked operative before each flight.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 27-81-00-040-001
27-84-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
One may be inoperative.
27-84-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
The valve block associated with SFCC 2 may be inoperative provided that the SFCC 2 slat
channel is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 27-51-02 SFCC Slat Channel
27-84-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 2 2 No
Both must be operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-92-01B Speedbrake Control System (speedbrake 2 or speedbrakes 3
and 4 inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
If speedbrake n°2 is inoperative:
Apply performance penalties associated with the pair of spoilers 2 inoperative. Refer to OpsProc
27-64-03A Spoiler 2 or 4
IN FLIGHT
If speedbrakes n°3 and n°4 are inoperative:
Do not use the speedbrakes.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-92-02A Ground Spoiler Control System (ground spoiler control system inoperative)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The autobrake function is not available. Refer to OpsProc 32-42-05A AUTO/BRK Function
CAUTION One or both thrust reversers may not deploy at landing. Consequently, for
performance determination, do not take into account the credit of the thrust
reversers.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The following penalties may be used for takeoff and landing performance determination if no takeoff
and landing data (predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program with
present failure case) is available.
WARNING ‐ Do not use this method with takeoff charts computed with other conditions or
by using TLC program.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff with tailwind.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff on wet or contaminated runways.
How to proceed ?
‐ Read, in 0 kt wind column of the takeoff chart computed in normal condition, the MTOW
and associated speeds (V1, VR, V2) corresponding to the actual temperature, even in the
case of headwind (the method does not take into account the headwind benefit on takeoff
performance).
‐ Apply the QNH and/or bleed corrections, if any, to determine the MTOW.
‐ Enter the following table to determine the MTOW and speed decrements.
‐ Applying these decrements, calculate the MTOW and associated speeds corresponding to the
actual temperature.
DECREMENTS (ΔW, ΔV1, ΔVR, ΔV2) WHEN GROUND SPOILER CONTROL SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE
CONFIGURATION
RUNWAY 1+F 2 3
LENGTH (m) ΔV1 ΔVR ΔV2 ΔV1 ΔVR ΔV2 ΔV1 ΔVR ΔV2
ΔW (kg/lb) ΔW (kg/lb) ΔW (kg/lb)
(kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt)
1 500 2 400/5 200 4 3 3 2 000/4 400 3 3 3 3 000/6 600 7 2 2
2 000 1 400/3 000 5 4 3 1 600/3 500 6 3 3 1 800/3 900 7 4 4
2 500 1 400/3 000 5 3 3 1 800/3 900 6 4 4 2 000/4 400 7 5 5
3 000 1 600/3 500 7 4 4 1 800/3 900 6 4 4 2 000/4 400 8 6 6
3 500 2 800/6 100 11 10 10 2 200/4 800 10 9 9 1 600/3 500 7 5 5
4 000 and 5 5
2 800/6 100 11 10 10 1 700/3 700 7 4 4 1 600/3 500 7
above
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
The speeds determined without failure and associated with the actual TOW may be retained
provided that they are all lower than the speeds calculated using above method.
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCG limitation).
TAKEOFF
If the above method was used for takeoff performance computation:
Perform the takeoff using full thrust (TOGA).
(o) OpsProc 27-92-02A Ground Spoiler Control System (ground spoiler control system inoperative)
Applicable to: RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8989, RP-C8991, RP-C8993, RP-C8994 and RP-C8995
GENERAL INFORMATION
The autobrake function is not available. Refer to OpsProc 32-42-05A AUTO/BRK Function
CAUTION One or both thrust reversers may not deploy at landing. Consequently, for
performance determination, do not take into account the credit of the thrust
reversers.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The following penalties may be used for takeoff and landing performance determination if no takeoff
and landing data (predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program with
present failure case) is available.
WARNING ‐ Do not use this method with takeoff charts computed with other conditions or
by using TLC program.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff with tailwind.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff on wet or contaminated runways.
How to proceed ?
‐ Read, in 0 kt wind column of the takeoff chart computed in normal condition, the MTOW
and associated speeds (V1, VR, V2) corresponding to the actual temperature, even in the
case of headwind (the method does not take into account the headwind benefit on takeoff
performance).
‐ Apply the QNH and/or bleed corrections, if any, to determine the MTOW.
‐ Enter the following table to determine the MTOW and speed decrements.
‐ Applying these decrements, calculate the MTOW and associated speeds corresponding to the
actual temperature.
DECREMENTS (ΔW, ΔV1, ΔVR, ΔV2) WHEN GROUND SPOILER CONTROL SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE
CONFIGURATION
RUNWAY 1+F 2 3
LENGTH (m) ΔV1 ΔVR ΔV2 ΔW ΔV1 ΔVR ΔV2 ΔV1 ΔVR ΔV2
ΔW (kg/lb) (kt) ΔW (kg/lb)
(kt) (kt) (kg/lb) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt) (kt)
1 500 2 800/6 200 7 2 2 3 000/6 700 7 2 2 2 600/5 800 7 2 2
2 000
2 600/5 800 6 2 2 2 400/5 300 4 1 1 2 400/5 300 6 2 2
2 500
1 600/3 600 3 1 1 1 600/3 600 3 1 1 2 600/5 800 5 2 2
3 000
2 400/5 300 5 2 2 2 600/5 800 6 2 2 2 000/4 500 8 5 5
3 500
2 800/6 200 5 3 3 2 000/4 500 7 5 5 2 400/5 300 8 7 7
4 000 and 3 3 6 6 6 6
3 400/7 500 5 2 200/4 900 7 2 200/4 900 8
above
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
The speeds determined without failure and associated with the actual TOW may be retained
provided that they are all lower than the speeds calculated using above method.
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCG limitation).
TAKEOFF
If the above method was used for takeoff performance computation:
Perform the takeoff using full thrust (TOGA).
GENERAL INFORMATION
The autobrake function is not available. Refer to OpsProc 32-42-05A AUTO/BRK Function
CAUTION One or both thrust reversers may not deploy at landing. Consequently, for
performance determination, do not take into account the credit of the thrust
reversers.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The following penalties may be used for takeoff and landing performance determination if no
takeoff and landing data (predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program
with present failure case) is available.
WARNING ‐ Do not use this method with takeoff charts computed with other conditions
or by using TLC program.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff with tailwind.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff on wet or contaminated runways.
How to proceed ?
‐ Read, in 0 kt wind column of the takeoff chart computed in normal condition, the MTOW
and associated speeds (V1, VR, V2) corresponding to the actual temperature, even in the
case of headwind (the method does not take into account the headwind benefit on takeoff
performance).
‐ Apply the QNH and/or bleed corrections, if any, to determine the MTOW.
‐ Enter the following table to determine the MTOW and speed decrements.
‐ Applying these decrements, calculate the MTOW and associated speeds corresponding to
the actual temperature.
TAKEOFF
If the above method was used for takeoff performance computation:
Perform the takeoff using full thrust (TOGA).
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-92-02B Ground Spoiler Control System (pair of spoilers 5 inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
For performance penalties, Refer to OpsProc 27-64-01A Spoiler 5
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-92-02C Ground Spoiler Control System (pairs of spoilers 1 and 2 or
pairs of spoilers 3 and 4 inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
If the pairs of spoilers 1 and 2 are inoperative:
For performance penalties, Refer to OpsProc 27-64-04A Spoilers 1 and 2
27-92-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 4 4 No
All must be operative.
27-92-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative.
27-92-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
27-93-01 ELAC 1
Applicable to: RP-C8992
27-93-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) (m) ELAC 1 or any ELAC 1 function may be inoperative provided that:
1) ETOPS is not conducted, and
2) All SECs, SFCCs, LGCIUs, RAs, ADIRS and FACs are operative, and
3) The pairs of spoilers 2, 3, 4, 5 are operative, and
4) The TR 1 and the TR 2 are operative, and
5) Both accelerometers associated with the ELAC 2 are checked operative before each
flight, and
6) All sidesticks transducers associated with the ELAC 2 and the three SECs are checked
operative before each flight, and
7) The DC TIE contactor 1PC1 is checked closed, before each flight, and
8) The elevators and roll spoilers control is checked operative through the SECs before
each flight, and
9) Above FL 200, the use of speedbrakes lever is limited to its half position.
Reference(s)
(o) Refer to OpsProc 27-93-01A ELAC 1
Applicable to: RP-C8992
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
If the AP 1 is engaged for landing:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
If the AP 2 is engaged for landing:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
Check of the elevator control through the SEC 1 and the spoilers control through the SEC 1
and the SEC 3:
‐ BLUE PUMP OVRD pb-sw........................................................................................Off
‐ Wait for hydraulic circuit depressurization.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check that blue elevator actuator symbol becomes amber.
‐ Wait 5 s
‐ BLUE PUMP OVRD pb-sw....................................................................................... ON
‐ ELAC 2 pb-sw......................................................................................................... OFF
‐ SEC 2 pb-sw........................................................................................................... OFF
‐ Move the CAPT stick from right stop to left stop, then from forward stop to aft stop.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check the correct movement of the pairs of spoilers 2, 3, and
4 and the full travel of both elevators.
‐ Move the F/O stick from right stop to left stop, then from forward stop to aft stop.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check the correct movement of the pairs of spoilers 2, 3, and
4 and the full travel of both elevators.
Check of the elevator control through the SEC 2 and of the spoilers control through the SEC
2 and the SEC 3:
‐ ELAC 2 pb-sw............................................................................................................On
‐ SEC 2 pb-sw..............................................................................................................On
‐ Wait 5 s
‐ YELLOW ELEC PUMP pb-sw................................................................................... Off
‐ Wait for hydraulic circuits depressurization.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check that the yellow and the green elevator actuators symbols become
amber.
‐ Wait 5 s
‐ YELLOW ELEC PUMP pb-sw...................................................................................ON
‐ ELAC 2 pb-sw......................................................................................................... OFF
‐ SEC 1 pb-sw........................................................................................................... OFF
Check of the elevator and the roll spoilers control through the SECs:
Put the aircraft in the test configuration:
Check of the elevator control through the SEC 2 and of the spoilers control through the SEC 2 and the
SEC 3:
‐ ELAC 1 pb-sw............................................................................................................On
‐ ELAC 2 pb-sw............................................................................................................On
‐ SEC 2 pb-sw..............................................................................................................On
‐ Wait 5 s
‐ YELLOW ELEC PUMP pb-sw................................................................................... Off
‐ Wait for hydraulic circuits depressurization.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check that the yellow and the green elevator actuators symbols become
amber.
‐ Wait 5 s
‐ YELLOW ELEC PUMP pb-sw...................................................................................ON
‐ ELAC 1 pb-sw......................................................................................................... OFF
‐ ELAC 2 pb-sw......................................................................................................... OFF
‐ SEC 1 pb-sw........................................................................................................... OFF
‐ Move the CAPT stick from right stop to left stop, then from forward stop to aft stop.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check the correct movement of the pairs of spoilers 2 and 5 and the full
travel of both elevators.
‐ Move the F/O stick from right stop to left stop, then from forward stop to aft stop.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check the correct movement of the pairs of spoilers 2 and 5 and the full
travel of both elevators.
Note: Due to the fact that the ELAC 1 is not electrically supplied, the F/O take-over pb cannot
disengage the AP 1.
IN FLIGHT
Above FL200, limit the use of the speedbrakes lever to its half position.
APPROACH
If the AP 1 is used for the approach:
The captain must be the PF.
27-93-01 ELAC 1
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8989, RP-C8991, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
27-93-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) (m) ELAC 1 or any ELAC 1 function may be inoperative provided that:
1) ETOPS is not conducted, and
2) All SECs, SFCCs, LGCIUs, RAs, ADIRS and FACs are operative, and
3) The pairs of spoilers 2, 3, 4, and 5 are operative, and
4) The TR 1 and the TR 2 are operative, and
5) Both accelerometers associated with the ELAC 2 are checked operative before each
flight, and
6) All sidesticks transducers associated with the ELAC 2 and the three SECs are checked
operative before each flight, and
7) The DC TIE contactor 1PC1 is checked closed, before each flight, and
8) The elevators and roll spoilers control is checked operative through the SECs before
each flight.
Note: F/O take-over pb cannot disengage AP 1.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
If the AP 1 is engaged for landing:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
If the AP 2 is engaged for landing:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
Check of the elevator and the roll spoilers control through the SECs:
Put the aircraft in the test configuration:
‐ YELLOW ELEC PUMP pb-sw...................................................................................ON
Note: If the Yellow Electric Pump is not available, pressurize the Yellow Hydraulic System
with a Ground Cart or with the Yellow Engine 2 Pump with the Engine 2 running.
‐ PTU pb-sw............................................................................................................AUTO
‐ BLUE ELEC PUMP pb-sw....................................................................................AUTO
‐ BLUE PUMP OVRD pb.............................................................................................ON
‐ ELAC 2 pb-sw............................................................................................................On
‐ SEC 1 pb-sw..............................................................................................................On
‐ SEC 2 pb-sw..............................................................................................................On
‐ SEC 3 pb-sw..............................................................................................................On
‐ Wait 5 s
Check of the elevator control through the SEC 1 and the spoilers control through the SEC 1
and the SEC 3:
‐ BLUE PUMP OVRD pb-sw........................................................................................Off
‐ Wait for hydraulic circuit depressurization.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check that blue elevator actuator symbol becomes amber.
‐ Wait 5 s
‐ BLUE PUMP OVRD pb-sw....................................................................................... ON
‐ ELAC 2 pb-sw......................................................................................................... OFF
‐ SEC 2 pb-sw........................................................................................................... OFF
‐ Move the CAPT stick from right stop to left stop, then from forward stop to aft stop.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check the correct movement of the pairs of spoilers 2, 3, and
4 and the full travel of both elevators.
‐ Move the F/O stick from right stop to left stop, then from forward stop to aft stop.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check the correct movement of the pairs of spoilers 2, 3, and
4 and the full travel of both elevators.
CAUTION If an expected spoiler or elevator movement does not occur, do not attempt
any reset.
Contact the maintenance.
Check of the elevator control through the SEC 2 and of the spoilers control through the SEC
2 and the SEC 3:
‐ ELAC 2 pb-sw............................................................................................................On
‐ SEC 2 pb-sw..............................................................................................................On
‐ Wait 5 s
‐ YELLOW ELEC PUMP pb-sw................................................................................... Off
‐ Wait for hydraulic circuits depressurization.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check that the yellow and the green elevator actuators
symbols become amber.
‐ Wait 5 s
‐ YELLOW ELEC PUMP pb-sw...................................................................................ON
‐ ELAC 2 pb-sw......................................................................................................... OFF
‐ SEC 1 pb-sw........................................................................................................... OFF
‐ Move the CAPT stick from right stop to left stop, then from forward stop to aft stop.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check the correct movement of the pairs of spoilers 2 and 5
and the full travel of both elevators.
‐ Move the F/O stick from right stop to left stop, then from forward stop to aft stop.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check the correct movement of the pairs of spoilers 2 and 5
and the full travel of both elevators.
CAUTION If an expected spoiler or elevator movement does not occur, do not attempt
any reset.
Contact the maintenance.
Check of the elevator and the roll spoilers control through the SECs:
Put the aircraft in the test configuration:
‐ YELLOW ELEC PUMP pb-sw...................................................................................ON
‐ PTU pb-sw............................................................................................................AUTO
‐ BLUE ELEC PUMP pb-sw....................................................................................AUTO
‐ BLUE PUMP OVRD pb.............................................................................................ON
‐ ELAC 1 pb-sw............................................................................................................On
‐ ELAC 2 pb-sw............................................................................................................On
‐ SEC 1 pb-sw..............................................................................................................On
‐ SEC 2 pb-sw..............................................................................................................On
‐ SEC 3 pb-sw..............................................................................................................On
‐ Wait 5 s
Check of the elevator control through the SEC 1 and of the spoilers control through the SEC
1 and the SEC 3:
‐ BLUE PUMP OVRD pb-sw........................................................................................Off
‐ Wait for hydraulic circuit depressurization.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check that blue elevator actuator symbol becomes amber.
‐ Wait 5 s
‐ BLUE PUMP OVRD pb-sw....................................................................................... ON
‐ ELAC 1 pb-sw......................................................................................................... OFF
‐ ELAC 2 pb-sw......................................................................................................... OFF
‐ SEC 2 pb-sw........................................................................................................... OFF
‐ Move the CAPT stick from right stop to left stop, then from forward stop to aft stop.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check the correct movement of the pairs of spoilers 2, 3, and
4 and the full travel of both elevators.
‐ Move the F/O stick from right stop to left stop, then from forward stop to aft stop.
‐ On the F/CTL SD page, check the correct movement of the pairs of spoilers 2, 3, and
4 and the full travel of both elevators.
CAUTION If an expected spoiler or elevator movement does not occur, do not attempt any reset.
Contact the maintenance.
CAUTION If an expected spoiler or elevator movement does not occur, do not attempt any reset.
Contact the maintenance.
APPROACH
If the AP 1 is used for the approach:
The captain must be the PF.
27-93-02 ELAC 2
Applicable to: ALL
27-93-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
Must be operative.
27-93-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
Must be operative.
27-94-01 SEC 1
Applicable to: ALL
27-94-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) (m) May be inoperative provided that:
1) ETOPS is not conducted, and
2) It is deactivated, and
3) The SEC 2 and the SEC 3 are operative, and
4) All ELACs, SFCCs, LGCIUs, RAs, FACs and ADIRS are operative, and
5) The SFCC 2 flap channel is operative, and
6) All aileron servo-controls associated with the operative SECs are operative, and
7) The TR 1 and TR 2 are operative, and
8) The sidestick transducers associated with the ELACs and the operative SECs are
checked operative before each flight, and
9) The DC TIE contactor 1PC1 is checked closed, before each flight, and
10) The elevators control through the SEC 2 and the ELACs and the roll spoilers control
through the operative SECs are checked operative before each flight, and
11) The Flight Manual performance penalties for the pairs of spoilers 3 and 4 inoperative
are applied.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-94-01A SEC 1
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
For performance penalties, Refer to OpsProc 27-64-05A Spoilers 3 and 4
Note: After application of the maintenance procedure, the C/B TRIPPED R ELEC BAY and the
C/B TRIPPED ON OVHD PNL alerts are displayed on the EWD.
CAUTION If an expected elevator movement does not occur, do not attempt any reset.
Contact the maintenance.
CAUTION If an expected spoiler or elevator movement does not occur, do not attempt any reset.
Contact the maintenance.
27-94-02 SEC 2
Applicable to: ALL
27-94-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) (m) May be inoperative provided that:
1) It is deactivated, and
2) The SEC 1 and the SEC 3 are operative, and
3) All ELACs, SFCCs, LGCIUs, RAs, FACs and ADIRS are operative, and
4) All aileron servo-controls and roll spoilers associated with the operative SECs are
operative, and
5) The sidestick transducers associated with the ELACs and the operative SECs are
checked operative before each flight, and
6) The elevators control through the SEC 1 and the ELACs and the roll spoilers control
through the operative SECs are checked operative before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-94-02A SEC 2
Note: After application of the maintenance procedure, the C/B TRIPPED REAR PNL N-R alert is
displayed on the EWD.
CAUTION If an expected elevator movement does not occur, do not attempt any reset.
Contact the maintenance.
CAUTION If an expected spoiler or elevator movement does not occur, do not attempt
any reset.
Contact the maintenance.
IN FLIGHT
If the SEC 1 and the SEC 3 fail during the flight:
Autoland is not permitted.
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1
Disengage the AP at 500 ft RA before landing in direct law.
When the AP is disengaged with the three SECs failed, it cannot be engaged again.
27-94-03 SEC 3
Applicable to: ALL
27-94-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative provided that:
1) The SEC 1 and SEC 2 are operative, and
2) The SFCC 2 flap channel is operative, and
3) All aileron servo-controls and roll spoilers associated with the operative SECs are
operative, and
4) The Flight Manual performance penalties for the pairs of spoilers 1 and 2 inoperative are
applied.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-94-03A SEC 3
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
For performance penalties, Refer to OpsProc 27-64-04A Spoilers 1 and 2
IN FLIGHT
If the SEC 1 and the SEC 2 fail during the flight:
Autoland is not permitted.
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1
Disengage the AP at 500 ft RA before landing in direct law.
When the AP is disengaged with the three SECs failed, it cannot be engaged again.
27-95-01 FCDC 1
Applicable to: ALL
27-95-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
27-95-02 FCDC 2
Applicable to: ALL
27-95-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 27-95-02A FCDC 2
MI-28-20 Distribution
28-20-01 Automatic Fuel Feed System
28-00-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
28-01-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 Yes
One or more may be inoperative provided that the corresponding pump is set to OFF when
the associated tank is empty.
28-01-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 Yes
One or more may be inoperative provided that the corresponding pump indication is
operative on the FUEL SD page.
28-01-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the X FEED indication is operative on the FUEL SD page.
28-01-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the X FEED indication is operative on the FUEL SD page.
28-01-01-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
One or both may be inoperative provided that the corresponding pump is set to OFF when
there is no fuel in the center tank.
28-01-01-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
One or both may be inoperative provided that the corresponding pump indication is
operative on the FUEL SD page.
28-01-01-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that all tank pumps indications are operative on the FUEL SD page.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-01-01-07A FUEL MODE SEL pb-sw FAULT light
AFTER TAKEOFF
If there is fuel in the center tank and with the slats retracted:
On the FUEL SD page, check that the center tank pumps indications are in line.
28-07-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-07-01-01A Fuel On Board (FOB) Indication on the FUEL SD page
28-07-01-02 Fuel Quantity Indication (FQI) in Degraded Mode on the FUEL SD page
Applicable to: ALL
28-07-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – 0 No
(o) One or more FQI may be in the degraded mode (with dashes on the two last digits)
provided that the loss of accuracy is taken into account for the fuel planning for each affected tank.
ON GROUND
The FQI is in degraded mode when the FOB indication is displayed with two dashes across the two
last digits on the EWD.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-07-01-03A Outer Tank Fuel Quantity Indication on the FUEL SD page
AFTER REFUELING
To check the fuel quantity in the associated tank: Refer to FCOM/PER-LOD-FUL-FUEL-A.GENERAL
INFORMATION.
28-07-01-03B High level fuel detection system checked operative before refueling and associated
inner tank indication operative
Reference(s)
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-07-01-03C Outer Tank Fuel Quantity Indication on the FUEL SD page
AFTER REFUELING
To check the fuel quantity in the associated tank: Refer to FCOM/PER-LOD-FUL-FUEL-A.GENERAL
INFORMATION.
28-07-01-03D High level fuel detection system checked operative before refueling
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-07-01-03A Outer Tank Fuel Quantity Indication on the FUEL SD page
AFTER REFUELING
To check the fuel quantity in the associated tank: Refer to FCOM/PER-LOD-FUL-FUEL-A.GENERAL
INFORMATION.
28-07-01-03B High level fuel detection system checked operative before refueling and associated
inner tank indication operative
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
Reference(s)
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-07-01-03C Outer Tank Fuel Quantity Indication on the FUEL SD page
AFTER REFUELING
To check the fuel quantity in the associated tank: Refer to FCOM/PER-LOD-FUL-FUEL-A.GENERAL
INFORMATION.
28-07-01-03D High level fuel detection system checked operative before refueling
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
B 2 1 No
Reference(s)
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-07-01-04A Inner/Wing Tank Fuel Quantity Indication on the FUEL SD page
28-07-01-04B High level fuel detection system checked operative before refueling
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
28-07-01-04B High level fuel detection system checked operative before refueling
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 28-40-00-040-005
AFTER REFUELING
To check the fuel quantity in the associated tank: Refer to FCOM/PER-LOD-FUL-FUEL-A.GENERAL
INFORMATION
May be inoperative provided that there is no fuel in the center tank or the fuel in this tank is considered
as not usable and as part of the ZFW and is taken into account for CG determination.
28-07-02-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 2 No
28-07-03-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 No
28-07-03-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
28-07-04-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(m) One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated LP valve is checked operative
before each flight.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM task
28-07-04-02 APU LP Fuel Valve Indication on the FUEL SD page
Applicable to: ALL
28-07-04-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
28-07-04-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
IN FLIGHT
When any inner tank fuel quantity reaches 750 kg (1 650 lb) of fuel:
On the FUEL SD page, check the associated outer tank transfer.
(o) One in each wing or both in one wing may be displayed provided that:
1) The fuel temperature indications of the non affected tanks are operative on the FUEL SD page, and
2) The fuel temperature is monitored before takeoff and during the flight.
Note: For fuel temperature limitations, Refer to AFM/LIM-28 Fuel Temperature Limits.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-09-01A FUEL L(R) INNER(OUTER)/WING TK HI TEMP Alert
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
On the FUEL SD page, monitor the fuel temperature before takeoff and periodically during the flight.
Note: For fuel temperature limits, Refer to AFM/LIM-28 Fuel Temperature Limits.
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
On the FUEL SD page, monitor the fuel temperature before takeoff and periodically during the flight.
Note: For fuel temperature limits, Refer to AFM/LIM-28 Fuel Temperature Limits.
(o) One in each wing or both in one wing may be displayed provided that:
1) The fuel temperature indications of the non affected tanks are operative on the FUEL SD page, and
2) The fuel temperature is monitored before takeoff and during the flight.
Note: For fuel temperature limitations, Refer to AFM/LIM-28 Fuel Temperature Limits.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-09-02A FUEL L(R) INNER(OUTER)/WING TK LO TEMP Alert
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
On the FUEL SD page, monitor the fuel temperature before takeoff and periodically during the flight.
Note: For fuel temperature limits, Refer to AFM/LIM-28 Fuel Temperature Limits.
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
On the FUEL SD page, monitor the fuel temperature before takeoff and periodically during the flight.
Note: For fuel temperature limits, Refer to AFM/LIM-28 Fuel Temperature Limits.
28-12-01 Overpressure Protector between the Inner and the Outer Tank
Applicable to: ALL
(o) One or both may be broken or missing provided that the fuel temperature of the inner tank is
monitored.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-12-01A Overpressure Protector Between the Inner and the Outer Tank
(Inner tank fuel temperature monitored)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The dispatch condition results in an unusual distribution of the fuel quantity: the outer tank of the
affected wing will be partially empty with the transfer valves normally closed.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Fuel management should be performed with care.
(o) (m) One or both may be broken or missing provided that the associated transfer valves are
secured in the open position after each refueling.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-12-01B Overpressure Protector Between the Inner and the Outer Tank
(Transfer valves opened)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The dispatch condition results in an unusual distribution of the fuel quantity: the fuel in the outer tank
on the affected side will transfer to the inner tank even when the inner tank is not empty.
28-12-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
28-12-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 2 2 No
28-12-04 Overpressure Protector between the Center and the Inner Tank
Applicable to: ALL
28-12-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The dispatch condition results in an unusual distribution of the fuel quantity: the fuel in the outer tank
on the affected side will transfer to the inner tank even when the inner tank is not empty.
(o) One or both may be inoperative in the closed position provided that the fuel in the LH outer
tank is considered as not usable and as part of the ZFW.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-15-01B LH Wing Transfer Valve (At least one transfer valve failed closed)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The fuel in the affected outer tank should be considered as not usable for the flight planning.
(o) (m) One may be inoperative in the closed position provided that the remaining LH wing transfer
valve is secured in the open position after each refueling.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-15-01C LH Wing Transfer Valve (At least one transfer valve open)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The dispatch condition results in an unusual distribution of the fuel quantity: the fuel in the outer tank
on the affected side will transfer to the inner tank even when the inner tank is not empty.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The dispatch condition results in an unusual distribution of the fuel quantity: the fuel in the outer tank
on the affected side will transfer to the inner tank even when the inner tank is not empty.
(o) One or both may be inoperative in the closed position provided that the fuel in the RH outer
tank is considered as not usable and as part of the ZFW.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-15-02B RH Wing Transfer Valve (At least one transfer valve failed closed)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The fuel in the affected outer tank should be considered as not usable for the flight planning.
(o) (m) One may be inoperative in the closed position provided that the remaining RH wing transfer
valve is secured in the open position after each refueling.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-15-02C RH Wing Transfer Valve (At least one transfer valve open)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The dispatch condition results in an unusual distribution of the fuel quantity: the fuel in the outer tank
on the affected side will transfer to the inner tank even when the inner tank is not empty.
28-20 – Distribution
28-20-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
ON GROUND
Pump 2 LH or pump 2 RH may be inoperative when JP4/JET B is used provided that the
fuel temperature is less than 30 °C.
(o) One may be inoperative provided that the flight routes permit a landing at a suitable airport if the
remaining center tank pump fails with fuel in the center tank.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-21-02A Center Tank Pump (One inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
In the case of dispatch with fuel in the center tank, the remaining center tank pump failure must be
considered for the flight planning. Operator has to ensure that, from any point of the first part of the
route where the center tank is not empty the aircraft may reach a suitable airport considering the
fuel quantity (FQ) contained in the center tank as definitely not usable for the flight planning (as a
consequence of the failure of the remaining center tank pump).
DURING COCKPIT PREPARATION
- X FEED pb-sw.............................................................................................................CHECK Off
- Affected CTR TK PUMP pb-sw.............................................................................................. OFF
- Operative CTR TK PUMP pb-sw............................................................................................OFF
IN FLIGHT
If the fuel quantity in the center tank is less than 200 kg (440 lb):
Operative CTR TK PUMP pb-sw........................................................................... Maintain OFF
When the fuel quantity in one wing inner tank is less than 4 500 kg (10 000 lb):
Operative CTR TK PUMP pb-sw......................................................................................On
X FEED pb-sw..................................................................................................................ON
When the fuel quantity in one wing inner tank increases above 5 500 kg (12 000 lb):
X FEED pb-sw.................................................................................................................. Off
Operative CTR TK PUMP pb-sw....................................................................................OFF
Note: Repeat the previous two steps as many times as necessary until the center tank is
empty.The operative center tank pump will switch off automatically
When the fuel quantity in the center tank is less than 250 kg (550 lb):
X FEED pb-sw.................................................................................................................. Off
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
CTR TK PUMP 1 and 2 pb-sw....................................................................................................... OFF
28-21-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 3 No
One may be inoperative provided that the associated pump is set to OFF when the center
tank is feeding.
(o) May be inoperative for four flights provided that ETOPS beyond 120 min is not conducted.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-22-01B APU Fuel Pump
28-23-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
Must be operative.
28-24-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 3 No
28-25-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 Yes
28-25-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 Yes
One or more indications may be inoperative provided that the fuel quantity is continuously
monitored on the FUEL SD page during refueling and defueling.
(m) One or more may be inoperative provided that the aircraft is manually refueled.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 28-25-00-040-005
One or more may be inoperative provided that overwing gravity refueling is performed.
Refer to FCOM/PER-LOD-FUL OVERWING GRAVITY REFUELING
28-25-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(m) May be inoperative provided that the valve is secured in the closed position.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 28-25-00-040-004
28-25-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
28-43-01B High level fuel detection and fuel used indication operative
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 11 0 No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated fuel quantity indication is
operative on the FUEL SD page.
28-43-01B High level fuel detection and fuel used indication operative
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 9 0 No
28-43-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that it is not required for refueling and defueling procedures.
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: MI28 - 33
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 28 - FUEL
28-46-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
One or both may be inoperative provided that the fuel quantity is continuously monitored during
refueling.
28-46-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that the fuel quantity is continuously monitored during refueling.
28-46-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
28-50-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 2 1 No
(o) One may be inoperative for 10 calendar days provided that ETOPS is not conducted.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 28-50-01A Fuel Quantity Indicating Computer (FQIC) Channel
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
1. Ensure that correct weights are entered in the FMGC associated with the affected FQIC channel.
2. In the case of failure in-flight of the remaining FQIC channel, all fuel quantities indications on the
EWD are lost.
29-01-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated reservoir quantity indication is
operative on the HYD SD page.
Note: Simultaneous illumination of the BLUE ELEC PUMP pb-sw FAULT light and the
ENG 1(2) PUMP pb-sw FAULT light with engines off may be due to a failed engine
oil low pressure switch. In this case, the ENG 1(2) OIL LO PR alert is inoperative.
Refer to Item 79-09-01 ENG 1(2) OIL LO PR Alert
29-01-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
29-01-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
29-01-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated reservoir quantity indication is
operative on the HYD SD page.
Note: Simultaneous illumination of the BLUE ELEC PUMP pb-sw FAULT light and the
ENG 1(2) PUMP pb-sw FAULT light with engines off may be due to a failed engine
oil low pressure switch. In this case, the ENG 1(2) OIL LO PR alert is inoperative.
Refer to Item 79-09-01 ENG 1(2) OIL LO PR Alert
29-01-01-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
29-01-01-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that the quantity indications of the yellow and green reservoir
are operative on the HYD SD page.
29-01-01-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
29-01-02-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 Yes
29-07-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
29-07-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 No
29-07-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
29-07-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
29-07-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 No
29-07-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the RAT is visually checked to be stowed before each flight.
29-07-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 No
(o) One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated system pressure is checked
available before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 29-07-07A System Label Indication on the HYD SD page
29-07-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 No
(o) One may be inoperative provided that the associated system label indication is checked operative
before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 29-07-08A System Pressure Indication on the HYD SD page
29-09-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be displayed provided that the associated system pressure indication is operative.
29-09-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
29-09-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
TAXI
Note: Due to a false HYD G(Y) ENG 1(2) PUMP LO PR alert displayed on the EWD, the "T.O
CONFIG NORMAL” line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . . TEST" line in the T.O MEMO.
Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST except a false HYD G(Y) ENG 1(2) PUMP LO PR alert.
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG TEST pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no
alert except a false HYD G(Y) ENG 1(2) PUMP LO PR alert.
29-09-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 No
(m) One may be inoperative provided that the air pressure is checked on the associated
reservoir before each flight.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM task
29-09-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 No
(m) One may be displayed for the green or the yellow system provided that the air pressure is
checked on the associated reservoir before each flight.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 29-34-00-040-001
29-09-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 No
One may be displayed provided that the associated reservoir quantity is checked on the
HYD SD page before each flight.
Note: 1. When the alert is displayed on the EWD, the associated PUMP pb-sw FAULT
light and the PTU pb-sw FAULT light (if the green or the yellow system is
affected) may simultaneously come on.
Refer to Item 29-01-01-01 B(Y) ELEC PUMP pb-sw FAULT light, and
Refer to Item 29-01-01-04 G(Y) ENG 1(2) PUMP pb-sw FAULT light, and
Refer to Item 29-01-01-06 PTU pb-sw FAULT light
2. If the blue reservoir is affected, EMER GEN may appear in the INOP SYS
column on the STATUS SD page before engine start.
29-09-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 No
The HYD G RSVR OVHT alert or the HYD Y RSVR OVHT alert may be displayed.
29-09-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) May be displayed provided that the PTU is checked operative before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 29-09-07A HYD PTU FAULT Alert
29-09-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(m) May be displayed provided that the RAT integrity is checked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 29-30-00-040-001
29-09-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 No
(o) One or more may be displayed provided that the associated system pressure is checked
available before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 29-09-09A HYD G(B)(Y)(B+G)(G+Y)(B+Y) SYS LO PR Alert
29-10-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
29-10-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
29-10-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 1 No
(o) The automatic control may be inoperative provided that the pump is manually operated.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 29-10-03A Blue System Electric Pump
(m) One or more may be inoperative provided that it is checked that there is no hydraulic fluid
leakage in the accumulator nitrogen charging circuit.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 29-10-00-040-007
(m) One or more may be inoperative provided that the affected accumulator is deactivated.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM task
29-10-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
Must be operative.
29-10-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
29-10-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 No
(m) One may be inoperative provided that it is removed.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM task
29-22-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
Must be operative.
29-23-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 1 No
(o) PTU may continuously run when set to AUTO provided that the operation of the PTU in both
directions is checked before the first flight of each day.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 29-23-01A Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Note: 1. The PTU pressurizes the system to a nominal value of 3 000 PSI PSI (± 200 PSI), but if
no consumers are operated the pressure is not constant. The PTU operates in a cycle
which keeps the pressure in the hydraulic systems between 2 100 PSI and 3 200 PSI.
2. For passengers comfort, the PTU may be set to OFF during the taxi after landing
provided that both engines hydraulic pumps are operative and running. The PTU must be
set back to AUTO before leaving the aircraft.
29-24-01A
(o) May be inoperative provided that the associated pb-sw is set to off.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 29-24-01A Yellow System Electric Pump
ON GROUND
If the pump continuously runs and does not stop when set to off:
DOORS/CARGO (T12 on 122 VU) C/B.....................................................................................Pull
o If unsuccessful:
‐ Y HYD/ELEC PUMP/NORM (AB 03 on 123 VU) C/B................................................... Pull
‐ Y HYD/ELEC/PUMP (AB 06 on 123 VU) C/B............................................................... Pull
Note: 1. If the pump continuously runs on the ground, there is a potential overheat situation.
2. The reset of the C/Bs must be limited to the time required to open or close the
cargo doors.
One may be inoperative provided that the associated engine anti-ice valve is considered
inoperative in the closed position.
Refer to Item 30-21-01A Engine Anti-Ice Valve
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated engine anti-ice valve is
considered inoperative in the open position.
Refer to Item 30-21-01 Engine Anti-Ice Valve
30-01-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that the anti-ice “arrow” symbols are operative on the BLEED
SD page .
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 30-01-01-03A ANTI ICE WING pb-sw FAULT light
30-01-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
30-01-02-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated low speed function is operative.
30-01-02-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
30-07-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
30-07-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(o) (m) The RH valve may be inoperative in the open position provided that the associated ECAM
procedure is applied.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 30-11-01A Wing Anti-Ice Control Valve
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Flight planning:
Increase fuel consumption by:
The WING ANTI ICE L(R) HI PR alert must not be displayed on the EWD.
AFTER TAKEOFF
When above 1 500 ft:
Apply the automatic recall of the WING ANTI ICE R VALVE OPEN procedure displayed on
the EWD.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of a Bleed Air Supply System:
PACK (affected side) pb-sw……………………………………………………………………….OFF
AFTER LANDING
Apply the automatic recall of the WING ANTI ICE R VALVE OPEN procedure displayed on the EWD.
(m) Refer to AMM 30-11-00-040-004
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Flight planning:
Increase fuel consumption by:
The WING ANTI ICE L(R) HI PR alert must not be displayed on the EWD
Continued on next page
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: MI30 - 7
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 30 – ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
AFTER TAKEOFF
When above 1 500 ft:
Apply the automatic recall of the WING ANTI ICE R VALVE OPEN procedure displayed on
the EWD.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of a Bleed Air Supply System:
PACK (affected side) pb-sw……………………………………………………………………….OFF
AFTER LANDING
Apply the automatic recall of the WING ANTI ICE R VALVE OPEN procedure displayed on the EWD.
(m) One or both may be inoperative in the closed position provided that:
1) ETOPS is not conducted, and
2) The aircraft is not operated in known or forecast icing conditions.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 30-11-00-040-001
(o) (m) One or both may be inoperative in the open position provided that:
1) The Flight Manual performance penalties are applied, and
2) The OAT is below ISA+35 °C.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 30-21-01C Engine Anti-Ice Valve
Applicable to: RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995, RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8989 and
RP-C8991
GENERAL INFORMATION
An higher idle speed is set on both engines when an engine anti-ice valve is inoperative in the open
position.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Note: 1. The following decrements may be used for takeoff performance determination only for
dry runways if no takeoff data (predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other
equivalent program with present failure case taken into account) is available.
2. Performance penalties apply whatever one or both valves are inoperative.
Takeoff performance:
Perform the takeoff using full thrust.
Apply the following reductions on the MTOW and the speeds :
GENERAL INFORMATION
An higher idle speed is set on both engines when an engine anti-ice valve is inoperative in the open
position.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Note: 1. The following decrements may be used for takeoff performance determination only for
dry runways if no takeoff data (predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other
equivalent program with present failure case taken into account) is available.
2. Performance penalties apply whatever one or both valves are inoperative.
Takeoff performance:
Perform the takeoff using full thrust.
Apply the following reductions on the MTOW and the speeds :
GENERAL INFORMATION
An higher idle speed is set on both engines when an engine anti-ice valve is inoperative in the
open position.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Note: 1. The following decrements may be used for takeoff performance determination only for
dry runways if no takeoff data (predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other
equivalent program with present failure case taken into account) is available.
2. Performance penalties apply whatever one or both valves are inoperative.
Takeoff performance:
Perform the takeoff using full thrust.
Apply the following reductions on the MTOW and the speeds :
Flight planning:
Increase fuel consumption by:
(m) One may be inoperative provided that the associated probe heating is checked operative
before each flight.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 30-31-00-040-001
(o) (m) The F/O PHC may be inoperative provided that the ADRs, heaters and failure alerts
associated with the operative computers are checked operative every day.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 30-31-01B Probe Heat Computer (PHC)
IN FLIGHT
If icing conditions are encountered:
ADR 2 pb-sw.........................................................................................................................OFF
CAUTION When ADR 2 is set to OFF, takeoff in CONF 1+F is not permitted.
The ADR 2 pb-sw must remain set to OFF for the remainder of the flight.
(o) (m) The F/O pitot heater may be inoperative provided that the ADRs, heaters and failure alerts
associated with the CAPT and the STBY probes (pitot, static, AOA, TAT) are checked
operative every day.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 30-31-02A Pitot Heater
Refer to OpsProc 30-31-01B Probe Heat Computer (PHC)
(m) Refer to AMM 30-31-00-040-002
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 30-31-00-040-002
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 30-31-00-040-002
(m) Both STBY static ports heaters may be inoperative provided that:
1) The ADRs, heaters and failure alerts associated with the CAPT and the F/O probes
(pitot, static, AOA, TAT) are checked operative every day, and
2) The OAT at the departure airport is above 5 °C when the runway is contaminated with
water or slush.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 30-31-00-040-003
(o) (m) One or both F/O static ports heaters may be inoperative provided that the ADRs, heaters
and failure alerts associated with the CAPT and the STBY probes (pitot, static, AOA, TAT)
are checked operative every day.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 30-31-03C Static Ports Heater
Refer to OpsProc 30-31-01B Probe Heat Computer (PHC)
(m) Refer to AMM 30-31-00-040-003
(m) One or both CAPT static ports heaters may be inoperative provided that:
1) The ADRs, heaters and failure alerts associated with the F/O and the STBY probes
(pitot, static, AOA, TAT) are checked operative every day, and
2) The OAT at the departure airport is above 5 °C when the runway is contaminated with
water or slush.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 30-31-00-040-003
(o) (m) The F/O AOA probes heating may be inoperative provided that the ADRs, heaters and
failure alerts associated with the CAPT and the STBY probes (pitot, static, AOA, TAT) are
checked operative every day
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 30-31-04A Angle of Attack (AOA) Probes Heating (F/O inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
If icing conditions are encountered during the flight:
Maximum landing capability may be downgraded to CAT 3 SINGLE.
RVSM operations are not permitted.
(o) (m) The STBY AOA probes heating may be inoperative provided that the ADRs, heaters and
failure alerts associated with the CAPT and the F/O probes (pitot, static, AOA, TAT) are
checked operative every day
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 30-31-04B Angle of Attack (AOA) Probes Heating (CAPT or STBY inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
If icing conditions are encountered during the flight:
Maximum landing capability may be downgraded to CAT 3 SINGLE
(o) (m) The CAPT AOA probes heating may be inoperative provided that:
1) The ADRs, heaters and failure alerts associated with the F/O and the STBY probes
(pitot, static, AOA, TAT) are checked operative every day, and
2) The aircraft is not operated in visible moisture or in known or forecast icing conditions
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 30-31-04C Angle of Attack (AOA) Probes Heating (CAPT or STBY inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
If icing conditions are encountered during the flight:
Maximum landing capability may be downgraded to CAT 3 SINGLE
Both may be inoperative provided that the aircraft is not operated in visible moisture or in
known or forecast icing conditions.
30-42-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
30-42-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 No
30-42-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
(o) One may be inoperative provided that the aircraft is not operated in known or forecast icing
conditions.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 30-42-03A Windshield Heating
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
When the PF side is inoperative:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
When the PNF side is inoperative:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 DUAL.
30-42-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
Automatic control may be inoperative provided that the PROBES/WINDOW HEAT system is
manually selected.
30-42-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated wipers can be positioned in a
location that will not obstruct forward vision.
30-45-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 2 0 Yes
30-71-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
30-81-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – No
30-81-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
IN FLIGHT
If icing conditions are expected during night operations:
Refer to AFM/LIM-70 Operations in Icing Conditions
MI-31-30 Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS) and Data Recording System
31-30-01 Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS)
31-30-02 Digital AIDS Recorder (DAR) *
31-30-03 Digital Flight Data Recorder (DFDR)
31-30-04 Data Management Unit (DMU)
31-30-04 Data Management Unit (DMU) part of Flight Data Interface and Management Unit(FDIMU)
31-30-05 Flight Data Interface Unit (FDIU)
31-00-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – – No
Q
QAR MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page .
31-00-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – – No
A
ACMS MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page.
31-00-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – – No
DAR MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page.
31-00-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
CFDIU MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page.
31-00-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
DMC 1/3 MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page provided that the DMC 2/3
MAINTENANCE message is not displayed on the STATUS SD page.
31-00-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
DMC 2/3 MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page.
31-05-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 22-05-01 AP Related Indications on the FMA
31-05-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 22-05-02 A/THR Related Indications on the FMA
31-05-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 22-05-03 Approach and Landing Capabilities on the FMA
31-05-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 22-05-04 Special Messages on the FMA
31-05-05 Actual Airspeed Reference Line and Scale Indications on the PFD
Applicable to: ALL
31-05-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-05-01 Actual Airspeed Reference Line and Scale Indication on the PFD
31-05-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-05-02 Mach Number Indication on the PFD
31-05-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-05-03 VMO/MMO Characteristic Speed Indication on the PFD
31-05-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-05-04 Altitude Indication on the PFD
31-05-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-05-06 Vertical Speed in Inertial Mode Indication on the PFD
31-05-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-05-07 Other Air Data Related Indications on the PFD
31-05-11A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-05-08 Attitude Indication on the PFD
31-05-12A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-05-09 Heading Indication on the PFD
31-06-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-06-01 Ground Speed Indication on the ND
31-06-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-06-02 True Air Speed Indication on the ND
31-06-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-06-03 Wind Indication on the ND
31-06-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-06-04 Heading Indication on the ND
31-06-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-06-05 Position (Aircraft Symbol) Indication on the ND
31-06-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-06-06 Radio Navaids Indications on the ND
31-06-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 34-06-07 Chrono Indication on the ND
31-07-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – No
Refer to corresponding item in the associated ATA chapter.
31-07-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 6 1 No
(o) TAT indication must be available.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-07-02A Permanent Data Indications on the SD
31-07-02 Permanent Data (TAT, SAT, GLOAD, UTC, GW) Indications on the SD
Applicable to: RP-C8995, RP-C8990 and RP-C8996
31-07-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 5 1 No
(o) TAT indication must be available.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-07-02A Permanent Data Indications on the SD
31-07-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 7 1 No
31-08-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – No
Refer to Item 77-08
31-08-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 28-07-01-01 Fuel On Board (FOB) Indication on the FUEL SD page
31-08-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
One or more may be inoperative.
31-08-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 27-08-01 Flap Position Indication on the EWD
Refer to Item 27-08-02 Slat Position Indication on the EWD
Note: Apply both MEL Items
31-20-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that:
1) The UTC indication from the CFDIU is operative on the permanent data of the SD, and
2) A chrono indication is operative on at least one ND.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-20-01A Electrical Clock Indicator
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
After any electrical power interruption resulting in the loss of the UTC on the SD:
Initialize the UTC and the date using the MCDU: Refer to FCOM/DSC-45-20 GMT/Date
Initialization.
31-30 - Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS) and Data Recording System
31-30-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
31-30-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 31-00-03 DAR MAINTENANCE Message *
Note: Failure of DAR is indicated by a MAINTENANCE message on the STATUS SD
page.
31-30-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided:
1) Cockpit Voice Recorder operates normally, and
2) Repairs are made within three flight days.
31-30-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
May be inoperative.
31-30-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
May be inoperative.
31-30-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided:
1) Cockpit Voice Recorder operates normally, and
2) Repairs are made within three flight days.
Note: If FDIU is inoperative the DFDR and the QAR* are inoperative.
Refer to Item 31-30-03 Digital Flight Data Recorder (DFDR), and
Refer to Item 31-30-06 Quick Access Recorder (QAR) *
31-30-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – –
Refer to Item 31-00-01 QAR MAINTENANCE Message *
Note: Failure of QAR is indicated by a MAINTENANCE message on the STATUS SD page.
31-30-07 Printer *
Applicable to: ALL
31-30-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
31-38-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
31-38-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
31-38-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
31-53-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
(o) FWC 2 may be inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-53-01A Flight Warning Computer (FWC)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
31-53-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
One may be inoperative.
31-53-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
One may be inoperative.
31-53-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
One may be inoperative.
31-53-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
One may be inoperative.
31-53-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 1 0 No
(o) Remarks:
Except for RVSM operations require its use, may be inoperative provided:
1) Autopilot altitude hold operates normally, and
2) Repairs are made within three flight days.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-53-06A Altitude Alert
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
When both altitude alert functions are inoperative:
RVSM operations are not permitted.
31-55-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
SDAC 2 may be inoperative.
31-56-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 11 0 Yes
One or more may be inoperative.
31-56-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
Must be operative.
31-56-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
One may be inoperative.
31-56-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
Must be operative.
31-56-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
Must be operative.
31-56-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
31-56-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-56-07A T.O CONFIG pb on the ECP
BEFORE TAKEOFF
31-62-01 DMC 1
Applicable to: RP-C8989 AND RP-C8991
31-62-01B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative provided that:
1) The DMC 2 and DMC 3 are operative, and
2) The ISIS airspeed indication is operative, and
3) The ISIS altitude indication is operative, and
4) The ISIS attitude function is operative, and
5) The standby compass is operative, and
6) The EIS DMC SWITCHING selector is set to CAPT 3.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-62-01B DMC 1
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
In the case of multiple undue ECAM alerts concerning ENG 1(2) N1(N2) (EGT)(FF)
OVER LIMIT
or
ENG 1(2) N1(N2)(EGT)(EPR)(FF) DISCREPANCY
or
NAV ATT(ALT1)(HDG) DISCREPANCY
or
NAV FM/GPS POS DISAGREE
or
FUEL F.USED/FOB DISAGREE
or
MINIMUM or HUNDRED ABOVE callouts, possibly associated with EFIS red flags, apply
the below procedure:
‐ Crosscheck the affected parameters on the EWD, PFD, ND, or on the related SD page to
confirm that the alerts are undue.
‐ EIS DMC SWITCHING selector.......................................................................................
NORM
Note: CAPT PFD and ND ae lost when EIS DMC SWITCHING selector is set to NORM.
31-62-01 DMC 1
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8992, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
31-62-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that:
1) The DMC 2 and DMC 3 are operative, and
2) The standby IAS indicator is operative, and
3) The standby altimeter is operative, and
4) The standby horizon is operative, and
5) The standby compass is operative, and
6) The EIS DMC SWITCHING selector is set to CAPT 3.
31-62-01 DMC 1
Applicable to: RP-C8897 AND RP-C8988
31-62-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that:
1) The DMC 2 and DMC 3 are operative, and
2) The ISIS airspeed indication is operative, and
3) The ISIS altitude indication is operative, and
4) The ISIS attitude indication is operative, and
5) The standby compass is operative, and
6) The EIS DMC SWITCHING selector is set to CAPT 3.
31-62-02 DMC 2
Applicable to: RP-C8992
31-62-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the AC BUS 1:
All the Display Units are lost.
Apply the ELEC AC ESS BUS FAULT alert procedure:
Refer to FCOM/PRO-ABN-24-ELECTRICAL-ELEC AC ESS BUS FAULT.
Note: The AC ESS BUS and the DMC 1 are recovered when the AC ESS FEED pb-sw is set
to ALTN.
31-62-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(m) May be inoperative provided that:
1) The DMC 1 and DMC 3 are operative, and
2) The standby IAS indicator is operative, and
3) The standby altimeter is operative, and
4) The standby horizon is operative, and
5) The standby compass is operative, and
6) The EIS DMC SWITCHING selector is set to F/O 3, and
7) The AC ESS FEED control is checked operative every day, and
8) The AC ESS FEED pb-sw FAULT light is checked operative every day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 31-68-00-040-005
31-62-02 DMC 2
Applicable to: RP-C8988, RP-C8989 and RP-C8991
31-62-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) (m) May be inoperative provided that:
1) The DMC 1 and DMC 3 are operative, and
2) The ISIS airspeed indication is operative, and
3) The ISIS altitude indication is operative, and
4) The ISIS attitude indication is operative, and
5) The standby compass is operative, and
6) The EIS DMC SWITCHING selector is set to F/O 3, and
7) The AC ESS FEED control is checked operative every day, and
8) The AC ESS FEED pb-sw FAULT light is checked operative every day.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-62-02A DMC 2
Applicable to: RP-C8988
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the AC BUS 1:
All the Display Units are lost.
Apply the ELEC AC ESS BUS FAULT alert procedure:
Refer to FCOM/PRO-ABN-24-ELECTRICAL-ELEC AC ESS BUS FAULT..
Note:The AC ESS BUS and the DMC 1 are recovered when the AC ESS FEED pb-sw is set to
ALTN.
(m) Refer to AMM 31-68-00-040-005
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
In the case of multiple undue ECAM alerts concerning ENG 1(2) N1(N2) (EGT)(FF) OVER
LIMIT
or
ENG 1(2) N1(N2)(EGT)(EPR)(FF) DISCREPANCY
or
NAV ATT(ALT1)(HDG) DISCREPANCY
or
NAV FM/GPS POS DISAGREE
or
FUEL F.USED/FOB DISAGREE
or
MINIMUM or HUNDRED ABOVE callouts, possibly associated with EFIS red flags, apply
the below procedure:
‐ Crosscheck the affected parameters on the EWD, PFD, ND, or on the related SD page to
confirm that the alerts are undue.
‐ EIS DMC SWITCHING selector................................................................................... NORM
Note: F/O PFD and ND are lost when EIS DMC SWITCHING selector is set to NORM.
31-62-02 DMC 2
Applicable to: RP-C8897
31-62-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(m) May be inoperative provided that:
1) The DMC 1 and DMC 3 are operative, and
2) The ISIS airspeed indication is operative, and
3) The ISIS altitude indication is operative, and
4) The ISIS attitude indication is operative, and
5) The standby compass is operative, and
6) The EIS DMC SWITCHING selector is set to F/O 3, and
7) The AC ESS FEED control is checked operative every day, and
8) The AC ESS FEED pb-sw FAULT light is checked operative every day.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 31-68-00-040-005
31-62-03 DMC 3
Applicable to: RP-C8989 AND RP-C8991
31-62-03B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative provided that:
1) The DMC 1 and DMC 2 are operative, and
2) The ISIS airspeed indication is operative, and
3) The ISIS altitude indication is operative, and
4) The ISIS attitude indication is operative, and
5) The standby compass is operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-62-03B DMC 3
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
In the case of multiple undue ECAM alerts concerning ENG 1(2) N1(N2) (EGT)(FF)
OVER LIMIT
or
ENG 1(2) N1(N2)(EGT)(EPR)(FF) DISCREPANCY
or
NAV ATT(ALT1)(HDG) DISCREPANCY
or
NAV FM/GPS POS DISAGREE
or
FUEL F.USED/FOB DISAGREE
or
Note: CAPT PFD and ND are lost when EIS DMC SWITCHING selector is set to CAPT 3.
31-62-03 DMC 3
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8992, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
31-62-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
31-62-03 DMC 3
Applicable to: RP-C8897 AND RP-C8988
31-62-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
31-63-01 PFDU 1
Applicable to: ALL
31-63-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
31-63-02 PFDU 2
Applicable to: ALL
31-63-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that PFDU 1, NDU 1, NDU 2, EWDU and SDU are operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-63-02A PFDU 2
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 2.
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
PFDU 2 knob..................................................................................................................................OFF
31-63-03 NDU 1
Applicable to: ALL
31-63-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that PFDU 1, PFDU 2, NDU 2, EWDU and SDU are operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-63-03A NDU 1
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 2.
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
NDU 1 knob....................................................................................................................................OFF
31-63-04 NDU 2
Applicable to: ALL
31-63-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that PFDU 1, PFDU 2, NDU 1, EWDU and SDU are operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-63-04A NDU 2
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 2.
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
NDU 2 knob....................................................................................................................................OFF
31-63-05 SDU
Applicable to: ALL
31-63-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) (m) May be inoperative provided that:
1) The PFDU 1, PFDU 2, NDU 1, NDU 2 and EWDU are operative, and
2) The AC ESS FEED control is checked operative every day, and
3) The AC ESS FEED pb-sw FAULT light is checked operative every day.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-63-05A SDU
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
SDU knob............................................................................................................................ OFF
Note: The AC ESS BUS is recovered when the AC ESS FEED pb-sw is set to
ALTN.
31-63-06 EWDU
Applicable to: ALL
31-63-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
Must be operative.
31-68-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the AIR DATA SWITCHING selector is set to NORM.
31-68-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the ATT HDG SWITCHING selector is set to NORM.
31-68-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
31-68-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the EIS DMC SWITCHING selector is set to NORM.
31-68-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
(o) One or both may be inoperative provided that:
1) The PFD and ND units are operative, and
2) The PFD to ND automatic switching is checked operative on the PF side before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 31-68-05A PFD/ND XFR pb on the Lateral Instrument Panel
IN FLIGHT
If a PFDU fails with no automatic transfer to the associated NDU:
‐ PFD brightness control knob................................................................................................OFF
‐ EIS DMC SWITCHING selector (Affected side).................................................CAPT 3 (F/O 3)
‐ Check that the PFD image is displayed on the associated NDU.
MI-32-41 Wheels
32-41-01 Nose Wheel Tie Bolt
32-41-02 Main Wheel Tie Bolt
MI-32-51 Steering
32-51-01 Nose Wheel Steering Control System
32-51-02 Rudder PEDALS DISC pb
32-51-03 NWS Electrical Deactivation Box
32-51-04 PARKING BRAKE light on the NWS Electrical Deactivation Box
(o) One or more may be inoperative provided that the ground brake cooling time is applied.
Reference(s)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The brake energy graph and the brake cooling time table given hereafter permit to determine the
ground brake cooling time.
If MAX reverser thrust was selected for all reversers during the braking phase:
Enter the brake energy graph: WITH THRUST REVERSERS USE.
If MAX reverser thrust was NOT selected for all reversers during the braking phase:
Enter the brake energy graph: WITHOUT THRUST REVERSERS USE.
‐ Enter with the aircraft takeoff weight (TOW) and with the rejected takeoff speed in kt IAS).
‐ Apply airport pressure altitude, temperature, wind and runway slope corrections.
Note: In the case of a dispatch with one brake inoperative (Refer to Item 32-42-01 Main Wheel
Brake or Refer to Item 32-42-02 Green System Brake), the brake energy accumulated is
increased by 34 %.
EXAMPLE:
55 152 153 154 155 155 ====> TIME (min) WITHOUT BRAKE COOLING FAN
46 46 46 46 47 ====> TIME (min) WITH BRAKE COOLING FAN
If the Energy and the OAT are not given in the table, use the values given in the next adjacent column/row.
For Example, with Energy = 78 MJ, and OAT = 15 °C, entering the next adjacent column/row
(Energy = 80 MJ, OAT = 20 °C) gives the following results:
Enter the following table with the energy and the OAT to determine the ground brake cooling time.
Note: In the case of a false BRAKES HOT alert due to a faulty BTMU or a faulty BSCU, the
"T.O CONFIG NORMAL” line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . . TEST" line in the T.O
MEMO. Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed
during the T.O CONFIG TEST.
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG TEST pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The brake energy graph and the brake cooling time table given hereafter permit to determine the
ground brake cooling time.
If MAX reverser thrust was selected for all reversers during the braking phase:
Enter the brake energy graph: WITH THRUST REVERSERS USE.
If MAX reverser thrust was NOT selected for all reversers during the braking phase:
Enter the brake energy graph: WITHOUT THRUST REVERSERS USE.
‐ Enter with the aircraft takeoff weight (TOW) and with the rejected takeoff speed in kt IAS)
‐ Apply airport pressure altitude, temperature, wind and runway slope corrections.
Note: In the case of a dispatch with one brake inoperative (Refer to Item 32-42-01 Main Wheel Brake or Refer to Item
32-42-02 Green System Brake), the brake energy accumulated is increased by 34 %.
EXAMPLE:
55 152 153 154 155 155 ====> TIME (min) WITHOUT BRAKE COOLING FAN
46 46 46 46 47 ====> TIME (min) WITH BRAKE COOLING FAN
If the Energy and the OAT are not given in the table, use the values given in the next adjacent
column/row.
For Example, with Energy = 78 MJ, and OAT = 15 °C, entering the next adjacent column/row
(Energy= 80 MJ, OAT = 20 °C) gives the following results:
Enter the following table with the energy and the OAT to determine the ground brake cooling time.
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG TEST pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The brake energy graph and the brake cooling time table given hereafter permit to determine the
ground brake cooling time.
If MAX reverser thrust was NOT selected for all reversers during the braking phase:
Enter the brake energy graph: WITHOUT THRUST REVERSERS USE.
‐ Enter with the aircraft takeoff weight (TOW) and with the rejected takeoff speed in kt IAS).
‐ Apply airport pressure altitude, temperature, wind and runway slope corrections.
Note: In the case of a dispatch with one brake inoperative (Refer to Item 32-42-01 Main Wheel
Brake or Refer to Item 32-42-02 Green System Brake), the brake energy accumulated is
increased by 34 %.
Continued on next page
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: MI32 - 13
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 32 – LANDING GEAR
Brake Energy with Thrust Reverser Use
EXAMPLE:
55 152 153 154 155 155 ====> TIME (min) WITHOUT BRAKE COOLING FAN
46 46 46 46 47 ====> TIME (min) WITH BRAKE COOLING FAN
If the Energy and the OAT are not given in the table, use the values given in the next adjacent column/row.
For Example, with Energy = 78 MJ, and OAT = 15 °C, entering the next adjacent column/row
(Energy = 80 MJ, OAT = 20 °C) gives the following results:
Enter the following table with the energy and the OAT to determine the ground brake cooling time.
Note: In the case of a false BRAKES HOT alert due to a faulty BTMU or a faulty BSCU, the
"T.O CONFIG NORMAL” line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . . TEST" line in the T.O
MEMO. Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed
during the T.O CONFIG TEST.
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG TEST pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The brake energy graph and the brake cooling time table given hereafter permit to determine the
ground brake cooling time.
If MAX reverser thrust was selected for all reversers during the braking phase:
Enter the brake energy graph: WITH THRUST REVERSERS USE.
If MAX reverser thrust was NOT selected for all reversers during the braking phase:
Enter the brake energy graph: WITHOUT THRUST REVERSERS USE.
‐ Enter with the aircraft takeoff weight (TOW) and with the rejected takeoff speed in kt IAS)
‐ Apply airport pressure altitude, temperature, wind and runway slope corrections.
Note: In the case of a dispatch with one brake inoperative (Refer to Item 32-42-01 Main Wheel Brake or Refer to Item
32-42-02 Green System Brake), the brake energy accumulated is increased by 34 %.
EXAMPLE:
55 152 153 154 155 155 ====> TIME (min) WITHOUT BRAKE COOLING FAN
46 46 46 46 47 ====> TIME (min) WITH BRAKE COOLING FAN
If the Energy and the OAT are not given in the table, use the values given in the next adjacent
column/row.
For Example, with Energy = 78 MJ, and OAT = 15 °C, entering the next adjacent column/row
(Energy= 80 MJ, OAT = 20 °C) gives the following results:
Enter the following table with the energy and the OAT to determine the ground brake cooling time.
Note: In the case of a false BRAKES HOT alert due to a faulty BTMU or a faulty BSCU, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL”
line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . . TEST" line in the T.O MEMO. Consider normal configuration for
takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the T.O CONFIG TEST.
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG TEST pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
32-07-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 6 0 No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the L/G gear position indications are
operative on the LDG GEAR indicator panel.
32-07-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 32-07-03A L/G Doors Position Indication on the WHEEL SD page
IN FLIGHT
MAX SPEED....................................................................................................................250 kt or M 0.60
32-07-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
32-07-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 No
32-07-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
32-07-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 6 0 Yes
32-07-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
32-07-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 No
32-07-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
32-07-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
32-07-11A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 No
32-07-12A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
32-07-13A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
2) The alternate braking system is checked operative before the first flight of each day, and
3) It is checked before each flight that the CFDS failure message related to the
BRAKES-N/WS MINOR FAULT alert do not report a fault on an alternate pressure
transducer.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 32-09-01C BRAKES-N/WS MINOR FAULT Alert (Alternate braking checked operative)
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 32-49-00-040-001
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 32-49-00-040-002
32-11-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 2 0 No
32-12-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 32-12-00-040-006
1) All ELACs, SECs, SFCCs, RAs, FACs, and ADIRSs are operative, and
2) Both air conditioning packs are operative, and
3) The FLEX Takeoff Mode is not used, and
4) The operation of avionics equipment is time limited on ground.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 32-31-01A Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU)
The following table gives the consequences on the systems affected when the LGCIU 2 is
inoperative and above mentioned C/B is pulled.
The BLUE ELEC PUMP FAULT light and the YELLOW ENG
2 PUMP FAULT light come on when engines are off.
ATC 2 The ATC 2 is not inhibited. On ground, set the ATC selector to
(on ground) SYS 1.
LIGHTS The strobe lights * are not inhibited on ground when set to On ground, set the STROBE sw to
AUTO. OFF.
The taxi light, the runway turn-off light, and the takeoff light
are inoperative on ground and in flight.
When FLX TO is selected, MCT thrust is set. Use the TOGA for takeoff.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of loss of the LGCIU 1:
AP and FD are lost.
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
32-31-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
32-32-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 16 16 No
32-32-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 1 0 No
GENERAL INFORMATION
AVNCS VENT • The system remains in the closed circuit • Time limitations on ground for
(on ground) configuration. ELEC PWR
• The ground cooling system * is supply:
inoperative. ‐ OAT ≤ 43 °C: No limitation
‐ OAT = 52 °C: 3 h
‐ OAT = 61 °C: 30 min
• Check that the air conditioning
system is operative.
HYD alerts The BLUE ELEC PUMP FAULT light and the YELLOW ENG 2
(on ground) PUMP FAULT light come on when engines are off.
ATC 2 The ATC 2 is not inhibited. On ground, set the ATC selector to
(on ground) SYS 1.
LIGHTS The strobe lights * are not inhibited. On ground, set the STROBE sw to
(on ground) OFF.
On ground, with flaps retracted, the logo lights do not come
on.
ELEC When only the APU generator or GPU supplies the aircraft, the
(on ground) main galleys are not supplied.
When FLX TO is selected, MCT thrust is set. Use the TOGA for takeoff.
32-32-02B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 1 0 No
May be inoperative for 7 flights provided that the LGCIU 2 is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU)
32-32-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 1 0 No
GENERAL INFORMATION
AVNCS VENT • The system remains in the closed circuit configuration • Time limitations on ground for
(on ground) • The ground cooling system * is inoperative. ELEC PWR supply:
‐ OAT ≤ 42 °C: No limitation
‐ OAT = 53 °C: 3 h
‐ OAT = 61 °C: 30 min
• Check that the air conditioning
system is operative.
ADIRU and The horn and the light are inoperative.
AVNCS VENT alert
(on ground)
HYD alerts The BLUE ELEC PUMP FAULT light and the YELLOW ENG 2
(on ground) PUMP FAULT light come on when engines are off.
TPIS * The WHEEL TYRE LO PR alert threshold is set
(on ground) to flight level.
LIGHTS The strobe lights * are not inhibited. On ground, set the STROBE sw
(on ground) to OFF.
On ground, with flaps retracted, the logo lights do not come on.
ELEC When only the APU generator or GPU supplies the aircraft, the
(on ground) main galleys are not supplied.
Continued on next page
GENERAL INFORMATION
AVNCS VENT • The system remains in the closed circuit configuration • Time limitations on ground for
(on ground) • The ground cooling system * is inoperative. ELEC PWR supply:
‐ OAT ≤ 42 °C: No limitation
‐ OAT = 53 °C: 3 h
‐ OAT = 61 °C: 30 min
• Check that the air conditioning
system is operative.
HYD alerts The BLUE ELEC PUMP FAULT light and the YELLOW ENG 2
(on ground) PUMP FAULT light come on when engines are off.
LIGHTS The strobe lights * are not inhibited. On ground, set the STROBE sw
(on ground) to OFF.
On ground, with flaps retracted, the logo lights do not come on.
ELEC When only the APU generator or GPU supplies the aircraft, the
(on ground) main galleys are not supplied.
When FLX TO selected, MCT thrust is set. Use the TOGA for takeoff.
May be inoperative for 7 flights provided that the LGCIU 2 is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU)
(o) OpsProc 32-32-04A LGCIU 2 Nose L/G Shock Absorber Proximity Detector
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
ECAM For WHEEL SD page and ECAM alert Refer to OpsProc 32-32-03A LGCIU 2 LH L/G Shock
(in flight and on ground) Absorber Proximity Detector "ECAM" line.
May be inoperative for 7 flights provided that the LGCIU 2 is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU)
Reference(s)
GENERAL INFORMATION
ECAM For WHEEL SD page and ECAM alert Refer to OpsProc 32-32-03A LGCIU 2 LH L/G Shock
(in flight and Absorber Proximity Detector "ECAM" line.
on ground)
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 32-32-07A LGCIU 2 Nose L/G Down Lock Proximity Detector
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYSTEMS CONSEQUENCES
WBS * (in flight and on ground) The WBS * is inoperative.
LIGHTS (in flight and on ground) The Taxi light and the takeoff light are inoperative.
ECAM (in flight and on ground) For WHEEL SD page and ECAM alert Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing
Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU) "ECAM" line.
May be inoperative for 7 flights provided that the LGCIU 2 is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU)
GENERAL INFORMATION
ECAM For WHEEL SD page and ECAM alert Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing Gear Control and
(in flight and on ground) Interface Unit (LGCIU) "ECAM" line.
May be inoperative for 7 flights provided that the LGCIU 2 is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU)
Reference(s)
GENERAL INFORMATION
ENG 2 REVERSER 2 is displayed in the INOP SYS column The thrust Reverser 2 is still
(on ground) on the STATUS SD page. operative.
May be inoperative for 7 flights provided that the LGCIU 2 is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU)
GENERAL INFORMATION
ECAM For WHEEL SD page and ECAM alert Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing Gear Control and
(in flight and on ground) Interface Unit (LGCIU) "ECAM" line.
May be inoperative for 7 flights provided that the LGCIU 2 is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU)
May be inoperative for 7 flights provided that the LGCIU 2 is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU)
(o) (m) One or both may be inoperative for 7 flights provided that:
1) The other proximity detectors are operative, and
2) The origin of the failure is checked to be electrical.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 32-32-13A LGCIU 2 Nose L/G Doors Open Proximity Detector
Refer to OpsProc 32-32-10A LGCIU 2 Nose L/G Up Lock Proximity Detector
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 32-32-14A LGCIU 2 RH L/G Doors Closed Proximity Detector
Refer to OpsProc 32-32-08A LGCIU 2 RH L/G Up Lock Proximity Detector
(m) Refer to AMM 32-31-00-040-003
May be inoperative for 7 flights provided that the LGCIU 2 is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU)
(o) OpsProc 32-32-16A LGCIU 2 Nose L/G Doors Closed Proximity Detector
Refer to OpsProc 32-32-10A LGCIU 2 Nose L/G Up Lock Proximity Detector
(m) Refer to AMM 32-31-00-040-003
May be inoperative for 7 flights provided that the LGCIU 2 is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 32-31-01 Landing Gear Control and Interface Unit (LGCIU)
32-33-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
32-41 – Wheels
32-41-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A – – No
(m) One tie bolt on one wheel may be broken or missing for 15 flights provided that:
1) The affected wheel tie bolt is removed, and
2) The affected wheel and the associated brake are checked for absence of damage.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 32-41-00-040-002
32-41-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A – – No
(m) One tie bolt on one wheel may be broken or missing for 15 flights provided that:
1) The affected wheel tie bolt is removed, and
2) The affected wheel and the associated brake are checked for absence of damage.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 32-41-00-040-003
32-41-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A – – No
(m) One tie bolt on one wheel may be broken or missing for 5 flights provided that:
1) The affected wheel tie bolt is removed, and
2) The affected wheel and the associated brake are checked for absence of damage.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 32-41-00-040-003
32-42-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 3 No
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The method explained hereafter allows the determination of the MTOW and associated
speeds (V1, VR, V2), by applying decrements on the MTOW and associated speeds
computed in normal conditions (i.e. all systems operative). The method is based on the use of
RTOW charts established at optimum V2/VS, optimum V1/VR, minimum V1.
WARNING ‐ Do not use this method with takeoff charts computed with other conditions.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff with tailwind.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff on wet or contaminated runways.
How to proceed ?
‐ Read, in 0 kt wind column of the takeoff chart computed in normal condition, the MTOW
and associated speeds (V1, VR, V2) corresponding to the actual temperature, even in the
case of headwind (the method does not take into account the headwind benefit on takeoff
performance).
‐ Apply the QNH and/or bleed corrections, if any, to determine the MTOW.
‐ Enter the following table to determine the MTOW and speed decrements.
‐ Applying these decrements, calculate the MTOW and associated speeds corresponding to
the actual temperature.
Continued on next page
CAUTION Do not extrapolate below the shortest runway length provided by the table.
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
The speeds determined without failure and associated with the actual TOW may be retained
provided that they are all lower than the speeds calculated using above method.
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCG limitation).
FOR TAKEOFF
FOR LANDING
Applicable to: RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995, RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8989 AND
RP-C8991
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
WARNING ‐ Do not use this method with takeoff charts computed with other conditions.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff with tailwind.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff on wet or contaminated runways.
How to proceed ?
‐ Read, in 0 kt wind column of the takeoff chart computed in normal condition, the MTOW and
associated speeds (V1, VR, V2) corresponding to the actual temperature, even in the case of
headwind (the method does not take into account the headwind benefit on takeoff performance).
‐ Apply the QNH and/or bleed corrections, if any, to determine the MTOW.
‐ Enter the following table to determine the MTOW and speed decrements.
‐ Applying these decrements, calculate the MTOW and associated speeds corresponding to the actual
temperature.
CAUTION Do not extrapolate below the shortest runway length provided by the table.
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
The speeds determined without failure and associated with the actual TOW may be retained
provided that they are all lower than the speeds calculated using above method.
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCG limitation).
Check that the corrected VR is equal to or above the minimum VR value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCA limitation).
Check that the corrected V2 is equal to or above the minimum V2 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCA limitation).
Check that the corrected V2 is equal to or above the minimum V2 due to VMU limitation (see
Refer to FCOM/PER-TOF-TOD-25-20 MINIMUM V2 LIMITED BY VMU/VMCA (KT IAS)).
FOR TAKEOFF
The autobrake function, even if available, must not be used.
If the above method was used for takeoff performance computation:
Perform the takeoff using full thrust (TOGA).
In the case of engine failure at takeoff:
Retract the landing gear when positive climb.
Vibrations may occur during 1 or 2 min after the retraction of the landing gear.
If both engines are operative:
Keep the landing gear down for 1 min.
FOR LANDING
The autobrake function, even if available, must not be used.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 Single.
The following penalties may be used for takeoff and landing performance determination if no
takeoff and landing data (predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program
with present failure case) is available.
WARNING ‐ Do not use this method with takeoff charts computed with other conditions.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff with tailwind.
‐ Do not use this method for takeoff on wet or contaminated runways.
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
The speeds determined without failure and associated with the actual TOW may be
retained provided that they are all lower than the speeds calculated using above method.
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCG limitation).
If the corrected V1 is lower than the minimum V1:
Take this last value as V1.
Further decrease the weight by 3 000 kg (6 600 lb) per kt difference between both values.
Check that the corrected VR is equal to or above the minimum VR value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCA limitation).
If the corrected VR is lower than the minimum VR:
Takeoff cannot be performed using this method.
Check that the corrected V2 is equal to or above the minimum V2 value shown on the RTOW
chart (due to VMCA limitation).
If the corrected V2 is lower than the minimum V2:
Takeoff cannot be performed using this method.
Check that the corrected V2 is equal to or above the minimum V2 due to VMU limitation (see
Refer to FCOM/PER-TOF-TOD-25-20 MINIMUM V2 LIMITED BY VMU/VMCA (KT IAS)).
If the corrected V2 is lower than the minimum V2:
Takeoff cannot be performed using this method.
FOR TAKEOFF
The autobrake function, even if available, must not be used.
If the above method was used for takeoff performance computation:
Perform the takeoff using full thrust (TOGA).
In the case of engine failure at takeoff:
Retract the landing gear when positive climb.
Vibrations may occur during 1 or 2 min after the retraction of the landing gear.
If both engines are operative:
Keep the landing gear down for 1 min.
FOR LANDING
The autobrake function, even if available, must not be used.
32-42-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 1 No
32-42-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
Refer to Item 32-42-08 AUTO/BRK (LO, MED, MAX) pb-sw DECEL light, and
Refer to Item 32-42-09 AUTO/BRK (LO, MED, MAX) pb-sw ON light
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 32-42-00-040-007
32-42-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
32-42-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
When T.O MEMO is displayed on the EWD, disregard the line:
AUTO BRK........................................................................................................................... MAX (blue)
32-42-06 Tachometer
Applicable to: ALL
32-42-06B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 4 4 No
Must be operative.
32-42-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(m) One or both may be inoperative provided that they are removed.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 32-42-00-040-006
32-42-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 Yes
One or more may be inoperative provided that, when appropriate, the associated
AUTO/BRK mode arming is displayed on the WHEEL SD page.
32-44-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 1 No
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 32-43-00-040-001
32-44-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
One or both may be inoperative provided that the BSCU system 1 and the BSCU system 2
are operative.
32-44-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
Must be operative.
32-45-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
32-47-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(o) One or both may be inoperative provided that the ground brake cooling time is applied.
Reference(s)
32-48-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
32-48-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
32-48-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
32-51-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 1 0 Yes
GENERAL INFORMATION
The electrical and hydraulic control of NWS is inoperative. Do not reset the WHEEL N/W STRG
FAULT alert with A/SKID & N/W STRG selector . The WHEEL N/W STRG FAULTalert indicates that
no hydraulic pressure is applied on the NWS actuator.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Note: the automatic roll out is not permitted (Refer to QRH/OPS Required Equipment for CAT2 and
CAT3).
DURING TAXI
Taxiing Procedure:
‐ Avoid high thrust settings, taxi speed limited to 20 kt .
‐ Check brakes temperature (if available) before takeoff.
If necessary, set the BRAKES FAN pb-sw * to ON.
‐ Minimum speed of 5 kt is required to initiate a turn.
‐ Apply asymmetrical thrust in straight taxi to compensate crosswind and differential braking for taxi
and line up as required.
‐ Avoid sharp turns and use maximum width of the runway.
‐ Do not apply too high asymmetrical thrust to avoid that nose landing gear get stuck to full travel
(90 °) (in that case release the aircraft by towing).
FOR LANDING
Do not use autobrake for landing.
In the case of crosswing component above 5 kt:
‐ Aircraft lateral control is achieved with the rudder until slowing to approximately 50 kt IAS.
‐ Upon reaching 50 kt IAS use differential braking to achieve taxi speed as required.
AFTER LANDING
Disengage AP at touchdown when autoland is performed.
32-51-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
GENERAL INFORMATION
(o) OpsProc 32-51-03A NWS Electrical Deactivation Box (towing mode is not available
when the lever is in the TOWING position)
AFTER PUSHBACK
A/SKID & N/W STRG selector..........................................................................................................ON
(o) OpsProc 32-51-03B NWS Electrical Deactivation Box (NWS Electrical Deactivation
Box deactivated)
AFTER PUSHBACK
A/SKID & N/W STRG selector..........................................................................................................ON
32-51-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) OpsProc 32-51-04A PARKING BRAKE light on the NWS Electrical Deactivation Box
BEFORE PUSHBACK
The parking brake setting must be verbally confirmed between the flight crew and the ground
personnel.
32-61-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
32-61-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(m) May be inoperative provided that the L/G GEAR NOT DOWN alert and the L/G GEAR NOT
DOWNLOCKED alert are checked operative.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 32-61-00-040-001
33-01-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
33-01-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
Dim lighting may be inoperative provided that the bright lighting is operative.
33-01-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
33-01-02-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(m) May be inoperative provided that the emergency lighting system is checked operative everyday.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 33-51-00-040-002
33-01-02-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
AFTER TAKEOFF
SEAT BELTS selector..........................................................................................................As required
DURING APPROACH
SEAT BELTS selector.......................................................................................................................ON
33-01-02-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
Applicable to: RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8989, RP-C8991, RP-C8993, RP-C8994 and
RP-C8996
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
Set the NO SMOKING selector ON as required.
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: MI33 - 3
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 33 – LIGHTS
33-01-02-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
Set the EXIT selector ON as required.
33-10-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
33-10-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
The lighting must be sufficient for cabin attendants to perform their duties.
33-20-02 Cabin Signs (No Smoking/No Electronic Devices/Fasten Seat Belt/Return to Seat)
Applicable to: ALL
One or more may be inoperative and the affected passenger seat may be occupied
provided that:
1) The passenger address system is operative, and can be heard throughout the cabin
during the flight, and
2) The passenger address system is used to alert the passengers when return to seat is
requested, seat belts should be fastened and smoking is prohibited.
33-20-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 Yes
(o) One or more may be inoperative and the affected lavatory may be used provided that:
1) The passenger address system is checked operative in the affected lavatory, and
2) The passenger address system is used to alert the occupant to return to his seat.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 33-20-03A Lavatory Sign (Return to seat)
DURING COCKPIT PREPARATION
Check that the passenger address function is operative in the affected lavatory with the door
closed.
33-30-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
33-40-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 Yes
One may be inoperative provided that the nose, taxi and takeoff lights are operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 33-40-04A Landing light Extension/Retraction System
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
The fuel consumption is increased by 1 % per landing light extended.
One or both may be inoperative in the retracted position provided that the associated light is
considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 33-40-03 Landing light
33-40-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
33-40-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
33-40-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 2 0 Yes
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 33-40-08A Beacon light
(o) One or both may be inoperative provided that the Strobe lights are operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 33-40-08B Beacon light
33-40-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 3 0 Yes
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated exit is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-01 Cabin Passenger Door, and
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated exit is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-01 Cabin Passenger Door, and
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
33-51-02B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – No
Must be operative.
33-51-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
33-51-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
33-51-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
33-51-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– – – No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated exit is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-01 Cabin Passenger Door, and
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
33-51-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 – –
May be inoperative provided accumulative damage on one side is not more than 15 meters.
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: MI33 - 13
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 33 – LIGHTS
33-51-07 Floor Proximity Emergency Escape Path Marking System Exit Marker
Applicable to: RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8989, RP-C8991, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
33-51-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 8 – No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated exit is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-01 Cabin Passenger Door, and
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
33-51-07 Floor Proximity Emergency Escape Path Marking System Exit Marker
Applicable to: RP-C8990
33-51-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 6 – No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated exit is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-01 Cabin Passenger Door, and
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated exit is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-02 Overwing Emergency Exit
33-51-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
33-51-11A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
33-51-12A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
33-51-13A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(m) May be inoperative provided that the operational test of the emergency lighting system is
performed as an alternative to this test.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 33-51-00-040-001
MI-34 Navigation
MI-34-11 Sensors
34-11-01 Angle of Attack (AOA) Sensor
34-11-02 CAPT Total Air Temperature (TAT) Sensor Element Connected to ADR 1
34-11-03 CAPT Total Air Temperature (TAT) Sensor Element Connected to ADR 3
34-11-04 F/O Total Air Temperature (TAT) Sensor Element Connected to ADR 2
34-00-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
34-00-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
34-01-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 Yes
34-01-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 Yes
34-01-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 Yes
34-01-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 Yes
34-01-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 Yes
34-01-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 0 Yes
34-01-01-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
34-01-01-31A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 Yes
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-01-01-31A ADR pb-sw
IN FLIGHT
If needed, the associated ADR can be set to OFF through the associated mode selector.
Note: If the ADR is set to OFF:
The associated IR is also set to OFF.
The F/CTL MAINTENANCE message is displayed on the STATUS SD page.
34-01-01-32 IR pb-sw
Applicable to: RP-C8989 AND RP-C8991
34-01-01-32A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 Yes
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-01-01-32A IR pb-sw
IN FLIGHT
If needed, the associated IR can be set to OFF through the associated mode selector.
34-01-01-33A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 Yes
34-01-01-33A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 Yes
May be inoperative provided that the MCDU 1 and the MCDU 2 are operative.
May be inoperative provided that the navigation is not planned on inertial data.
May be inoperative provided that the MCDU 1 and the MCDU 2 are operative.
34-01-01-37A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the MCDU 1 and the MCDU 2 are operative.
34-01-02-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 2 – No
34-05-01 Actual Airspeed Reference Line and Scale Indication on the PFD
Applicable to: ALL
34-05-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
Both may be inoperative provided that the flight altitude is limited to 25 000 ft.
Both may be inoperative provided that the SPD/MACH selection window on the FCU is
operative.
Both may be inoperative provided that the flight altitude is limited to 25 000 ft.
Both may be inoperative provided that the ISIS Mach Number indication is operative.
34-05-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
34-05-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 2 2 No
34-05-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 2 2 No
34-05-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
34-05-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-05-07A Other Air Data Related Indications on the PFD
GENERAL INFORMATION
For F, S, Green Dot determination, refer to the QRH/FPE-SPD Speeds.
For VAPP determination, refer to QRH/FPE-IFL VAPP Determination.
For VFE or VLE determination, refer to the corresponding placard in the cockpit.
34-05-08 Attitude Indication on the PFD
Applicable to: ALL
34-05-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
34-05-09 Heading Indication on the PFD
Applicable to: ALL
34-05-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
34-06-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
34-06-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
34-06-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
34-06-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
One may be inoperative provided that the heading indications are operative on both PFDs.
34-06-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
34-06-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
34-06-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
34-10-01 ADR 1
Applicable to: ALL
34-10-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 1 1 No
Must be operative.
34-10-02 ADR 2
Applicable to: ALL
34-10-02B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-02B ADR 2
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
FOR TAKEOFF
Takeoff in CONF 1+F is not permitted.
Note: When the ADR 2 pb-sw is set to OFF, and if the aircraft is in CONF 1+F, the SFCS n°2
Flap channel is unable to crosscheck the airspeed coming from the ADR 1 with the ADR 2
airspeed coming from the SFCS n°2 Slat channel. This may lead to an uncommanded flap
retraction during the takeoff. As a consequence, takeoff in CONF 1+F is not permitted when
the ADR 2 pb-sw is set to OFF.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
RVSM operations are not permitted.
FOR TAKEOFF
Takeoff in CONF 1+F is not permitted.
Note: When the ADR 2 pb-sw is set to OFF, and if the aircraft is in CONF 1+F, the SFCS
n°2 Flap channel is unable to crosscheck the airspeed coming from the ADR 1 with
the ADR 2 airspeed coming from the SFCS n°2 Slat channel. This may lead to an
uncommanded flap retraction during the takeoff. As a consequence, takeoff in CONF 1+F
is not permitted when the ADR 2 pb-sw is set to OFF.
34-10-03 ADR 3
Applicable to: ALL
34-10-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that the IR 1, IR 2, ADR 1 and ADR 2 are operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-03A ADR 3
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
34-10-04 IR 1
Applicable to: RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995, RP-C8990, RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8989, RP-C8991 and RP-C8996
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-04B IR 1
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-04C IR 1
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
34-10-04 IR 1
Applicable to: RP-C8988
Reference(s)
(o) Refer to OpsProc 34-10-04C IR 1
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
34-10-05 IR 2
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-05B IR 2 (IR 2 totally inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
FOR TAKEOFF
Takeoff in CONF 1+F is not permitted.
Note: When the ADR 2 is set to OFF, and if the aircraft is in CONF 1+F, the SFCS n°2 Flap
channel is unable to crosscheck the airspeed coming from the ADR 1 with the ADR 2
airspeed coming from the SFCS n°2 Slat channel. This may lead to an
uncommanded flap retraction during the takeoff. As a consequence, takeoff in CONF
1+F is not permitted when the ADR 2 is set to OFF.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
RVSM operations are not permitted because the ADR 2 is set to OFF.
FOR TAKEOFF
Takeoff in CONF 1+F is not permitted.
Note: When the ADR 2 is set to OFF, and if the aircraft is in CONF 1+F, the SFCS n°2 Flap
channel is unable to crosscheck the airspeed coming from the ADR 1 with the ADR 2
airspeed coming from the SFCS n°2 Slat channel. This may lead to an uncommanded
flap retraction during the takeoff. As a consequence, takeoff in CONF 1+F is not
permitted when the ADR 2 is set to OFF.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-05C IR 2 (only NAV mode of IR 2 inoperative)
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
34-10-05 IR 2
Applicable to: RP-C8989 AND RP-C8991
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-05B IR 2 (IR 2 totally inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-05C IR 2 (only NAV mode of IR 2 inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
34-10-05 IR 2
Applicable to: RP-C8988
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-05B IR 2 (IR 2 totally inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
FOR TAKEOFF
Takeoff in CONF 1+F is not permitted.
Note: When the ADR 2 is set to OFF, and if the aircraft is in CONF 1+F, the SFCS n°2 Flap
channel is unable to crosscheck the airspeed coming from the ADR 1 with the ADR 2
airspeed coming from the SFCS n°2 Slat channel. This may lead to an
uncommanded flap retraction during the takeoff. As a consequence, takeoff in CONF
1+F is not permitted when the ADR 2 is set to OFF.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-06A IR 3
(for aircraft without Honeywell 10 MCU ADIRU with IR 3 totally inoperative)
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and
RP-C8996
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-06A IR 3
(for aircraft without Honeywell 10 MCU ADIRU with IR 3 totally inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-06B IR 3
(for aircraft without Honeywell 10 MCU ADIRU with only NAV mode of IR 3 inoperative)
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-07A IR 3
(for aircraft with Honeywell 10 MCU ADIRU with IR 3 totally inoperative)
GENERAL INFORMATION
For aircraft fitted with Honeywell 10 MCU ADIRU, disregard the characteristic speeds (Vls, F, S, Green
Dot) displayed on the PFD. For characteristic speeds (Vls, F, S, Green Dot) determination, refer to
QRH/FPE-SPD Speeds. The “CHECK GW” (or “CHECK WEIGHT”) message may be displayed on the
MCDU.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-07B IR 3
(for aircraft with Honeywell 10 MCU ADIRU with only NAV mode of IR 3 inoperative)
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995
and RP-C8996
Continued on next page
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: MI34 - 26
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 34 – NAVIGATION
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-07A IR 3 (for aircraft with Honeywell 10 MCU ADIRU with IR 3 totally inoperative)
GENERAL INFORMATION
For aircraft fitted with Honeywell 10 MCU ADIRU, disregard the characteristic speeds (Vls, F, S,
Green Dot) displayed on the PFD. For characteristic speeds (Vls, F, S, Green Dot) determination,
refer to QRH/FPE-SPD Speeds. The “CHECK GW” (or “CHECK WEIGHT”) message may be
displayed on the MCDU.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
DURING COCKPIT PREPARATION
IR 3 pb-sw...................................................................................................................................... OFF
The F/CTL MAINTENANCE message is displayed on the STATUS SD page.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-10-07B IR 3
(for aircraft with Honeywell 10 MCU ADIRU with only NAV mode of IR 3 inoperative)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 3 SINGLE.
DURING COCKPIT PREPARATION
‐ IR 3 mode selector...................................................................................................................ATT
‐ The heading must be entered through the MCDU for the IR 3 and has to be frequently reset
(Refer to FCOM/PRO-ABN-34 IR ALIGNMENT IN ATT MODE).
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: MI34 - 27
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 34 – NAVIGATION
34-11 - Sensors
The F/O or the STBY Angle Of Attack sensor may be inoperative provided that the
associated ADR is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 34-10-02 ADR 2, or
Refer to Item 34-10-03 ADR 3
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-11-02A CAPT Total Air Temperature (TAT) Sensor Element Connected to the ADR 1
Refer to OpsProc 31-07-02A Permanent Data Indications on the SD
34-11-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
34-11-04 F/O Total Air Temperature (TAT) Sensor Element Connected to the ADR 2
Applicable to: ALL
34-11-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-11-04A F/O Total Air Temperature (TAT) Sensor Element Connected to the ADR 2
Refer to OpsProc 31-07-02A Permanent Data Indications on the SD
May be inoperative provided that the aircraft is operated in day VMC conditions.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-21-03A Standby IAS Indicator
34-21-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 4 0 No
34-21-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
Must be operative.
34-22-01B Applicable to aircraft fitted with NORTHROP GRUMMAN (LITTON) ADIRU P/N
465020-0303-0316 or subsequent, having the shelf modified (MOD 30650/SB
25-1248, or MOD 30872) or HONEYWELL ADIRU
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-22-01B Standby Compass Indicator
Must be operative.
34-22-01B Applicable to aircraft fitted with NORTHROP GRUMMAN (LITTON) ADIRU P/N
465020-0303-0316 or subsequent, having the shelf modified (MOD 30650/SB
25-1248, or MOD 30872) or HONEYWELL ADIRU
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-22-01B Standby Compass Indicator
34-22-01C Applicable to aircraft fitted with NORTHROP GRUMMAN (LITTON) ADIRU P/N
465020-0303-0316 or subsequent, having the shelf modified (Mod 30650/SB
25-1248, or MOD 30872) or HONEYWELL ADIRU
Must be operative.
34-22-01B Applicable to aircraft fitted with NORTHROP GRUMMAN (LITTON) ADIRU P/N
465020-0303-0316 or subsequent, having the shelf modified (MOD 30650/SB
25-1248, or MOD 30872) or HONEYWELL ADIRU
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-22-01B Standby Compass Indicator
34-22-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
Must be operative.
34-22-03B Applicable to aircraft fitted with NORTHROP GRUMMAN (LITTON) ADIRU P/N
465020-0303-0316 or subsequent, having the shelf modified (MOD 30650/SB
25-1248, or MOD 30872) or HONEYWELL ADIRU
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that the aircraft is operated in day VMC conditions.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-22-03B Standby Horizon Indicator
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
34-23-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
B 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the aircraft is operated in day VMC conditions.
34-23-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
34-23-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
Must be operative.
34-23-04B Applicable to aircraft fitted with NORTHROP GRUMMAN (LITTON) ADIRU P/N
465020-0303-0316 or subsequent, having the shelf modified (MOD 30650/SB
25-1248, or MOD 30872) or HONEYWELL ADIRU
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
B 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative provided that the aircraft is operated in day VMC conditions.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-23-04B ISIS Attitude Indication
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1.
34-23-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
34-23-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
34-30-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 1 No
(o) Note: When the ILS 1 is inoperative, the GPWS * or the reactive modes of TAWS *
are inoperative.
Refer to Item 34-40-01 Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS)/Terrain
Awareness and Warning System (TAWS)
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-30-04A Instrument Landing System (ILS)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
When one ILS is inoperative:
Maximum landing capability is ILS CAT 1.
When both ILS are inoperative:
CAT 1 ILS approaches are not permitted.
34-40-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided:
1) Flight crew increases awareness of airplane configuration, altitude and flight path. This may include
flight crew use of all airplane systems available (autoflight, autoland, ILS, FMC) and flight crew
review of Minimum Enroute Altitudes and altitude call-outs, and
2) Repairs are made within three flight days.
34-40-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-40-02A Radio Altimeter Automatic Callout
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 2 without autoland.
34-40-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
(o) One may be inoperative provided that both FCU channels, all ELACs, SECs, ADIRUs,
SFCCs, LGCIUs and FACs are operative.
Note: When the radio altimeter 1 is inoperative, the GPWS * or the reactive modes of
TAWS * are inoperative.
Refer to Item 34-40-01 Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS)/Terrain
Awareness and Warning System (TAWS)
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-40-03A Radio Altimeter System
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Maximum landing capability is CAT 2.
The F/CTL MAINTENANCE message is displayed on the STATUS SD page.
34-40-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 1 No
34-40-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative provided aircraft is operated during daytime/VMC only and other
potentially hazardous weather conditions that can be detected with airborne weather radar are
not expected along the route to be flown as advised by weather forecast and no reported
windshear on the arrival/departure aerodrome.
Note: When the weather radar system is inoperative, the predictive Windshear Detection
System * is inoperative .
Refer to Item 34-40-06 Predictive Windshear Detection Function (If Installed)
Issued Date: 21 May 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 01 Control Page: MI34 - 40
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 34 – NAVIGATION
34-40-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) One may be inoperative provided that the GPWS or the TAWS aural and visual warnings
are checked operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-40-07A GPWS/PULL UP-G/S pb-sw
Both may be inoperative provided that the GPWS or the TAWS is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 34-40-01 Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS)/Terrain Awareness and
Warning System (TAWS)
(o) One may be inoperative provided that the GPWS or the TAWS aural and visual warnings
are checked operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-40-07A GPWS/PULL UP-G/S pb-sw
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 34-40-07A GPWS/PULL UP-G/S pb-sw
DURING COCKPIT PREPARATION
Check of the GPWS (or TAWS) aural and visual warnings:
‐ PULL UP – G/S pb-sw (operative)....................................................................................... Press
‐ Check that the GPWS (or the TAWS) aural and visual warnings are operative.
Refer to FCOM/DSC-34-70 GPWS.
34-50-01 ATC
Applicable to: ALL
34-50-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 2 1 No
34-50-03 ADF *
Applicable to: ALL
34-50-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
34-50-04 DME
Applicable to: ALL
34-50-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
Note: If DME becomes inoperative enroute, the pilot shall notify the ATC of that failure as soon as it
occurs.
34-50-05 VOR
Applicable to: ALL
34-50-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
34-50-06 MARKER
Applicable to: ALL
34-50-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
34-50-07 DDRMI
Applicable to: RP-C8990, RP-C8994 and RP-C8995
34-50-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 1 0 No
Note: No entry in the logbook is necessary when the DDRMI is intentionally deactivated.
34-50-07 DDRMI
Applicable to: RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8989, RP-C8993 and RP-C8996
34-50-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
34-50-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
34-50-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
MI-35 Oxygen
35-01-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
35-01-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
35-01-01-03A
May be inoperative.
(m) May be inoperative provided that the AUTO control function is checked operative.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 35-23-00-040-008
35-01-01-31B FL limitation
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
`
(o) May be inoperative provided that:
1) The operating altitude is limited to FL 250, and
2) The minimum operating altitude is in accordance with applicable operating regulations,
and
3) The portable oxygen units (supplemental oxygen) are provided in accordance with
applicable regulations.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 35-01-01-31B MANUAL Control of the MASK MAN ON pb
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
‐ The flight crew shall brief the cabin crew on the alternate emergency procedures that will be used.
‐ The affected occupants are briefed appropriately.
‐ The quantity of oxygen needed for the intended flight is in accordance with EU OPS/JAR-OPS
1.770(b).
35-01-01-32A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
ON GROUND
Inform the cabin crew that if the cabin altitude exceeds 12 500 ft, the oxygen masks may drop down.
35-07-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) (m) May be inoperative provided that the oxygen pressure is checked by direct reading before
each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 35-07-01A Crew OXY High Pressure Indication on the DOOR/OXY SD Page
35-07-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) (m) May be inoperative provided that the oxygen pressure is checked before the first flight of
each day.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 35-07-02A Crew Oxygen REGUL LO PR Indication on the DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
On the DOOR/OXY SD page, disregard the REGUL LO PR indication and the associated OXY
indication.
35-10-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – Yes
Each occupant of the cockpit must have his assigned mask operative.
35-10-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 2 Yes
35-10-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 35-10-03A Exterior Crew Oxygen Overpressure Indicator Disc (Green Disc)
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated seats are considered
inoperative.
Refer to Item 25-20-01 Passenger Seat
35-20-01B FL limitation
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 Yes
(o) One or more may be inoperative and the associated seats may be occupied provided that:
1) The operating altitude is limited to FL 250, and
2) The minimum operating altitude is in accordance with applicable operating regulations,
and
3) Portable oxygen units (supplemental oxygen) are provided in accordance with applicable
regulations.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 35-20-01B Passenger Oxygen Unit
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
‐ The flight crew shall brief the cabin crew on the alternate emergency procedures that will be used.
‐ The affected occupants are briefed appropriately.
‐ The quantity of oxygen needed for the intended flight is in accordance with EU OPS/JAR-OPS
1.770(b).
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated seats are considered
inoperative.
Refer to Item 25-20-03 Cabin Attendant Seat
35-20-02B FL limitation
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 Yes
(o) One or more may be inoperative and the associated seats may be occupied provided that:
1) The operating altitude is limited to FL 250, and
2) The minimum operating altitude is in accordance with applicable operating regulations,
and
3) Portable oxygen units (supplemental oxygen) are provided in accordance with applicable
regulations.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 35-20-02B Cabin Attendant Oxygen Unit
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
‐ The flight crew shall brief the cabin crew on the alternate emergency procedures that will be used.
‐ The quantity of oxygen needed for the intended flight is in accordance with EU OPS/JAR-OPS
1.770(b).
35-20-03A
Note: For an inoperative cabin attendant oxygen unit located within the galley area:
Refer to Item 35-20-02 Cabin Attendant Oxygen Unit
_________________________________________________________________________________
(o) One or more may be inoperative and the associated galley area may be occupied provided
that an adjacent cabin attendant individual oxygen unit is available for each occupants of
the associated galley area.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 35-20-04A Galley Oxygen Unit (cabin attendant oxygen unit available near the galley)
IN FLIGHT
The number of galley area occupants must be in accordance with the available adjacent cabin
attendant oxygen units.
(o) One or more may be inoperative and the associated galley area may be occupied provided
that a cabin attendant portable oxygen device is available for each occupants of the
associated galley area.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 35-20-04B Galley Oxygen Unit (cabin attendant portable oxygen device
available near the galley)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Before the flight, the flight crew shall brief the cabin crew that the galley oxygen unit is inoperative
and that the cabin attendant portable oxygen device should be used instead.
35-20-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D – 1 No
35-30-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
35-30-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 4 4 No
MI-36 Pneumatic
(m) AIR BLEED MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page provided that it
is checked that the CFDS does not report a fault on a BMC or on a pylon leak detection loop.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 36-11-00-040-004
36-00-01B No FL limitation
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
(o) AIR BLEED MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page provided that:
Applicable to: RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
Note: The use of the APU bleed air supply system for Main Engine Start is permitted.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT.
(o) AIR BLEED MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page provided that:
Applicable to: RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
Note: The use of the APU bleed air supply system for Main Engine Start is permitted.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT.
(o) AIR BLEED MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page provided that:
Note: The use of the APU bleed air supply system for Main Engine Start is permitted.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT.
(o) AIR BLEED MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page provided that:
Note: The use of the APU bleed air supply system for Main Engine Start is permitted.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT.
36-00-01D No FL limitation
(o) AIR BLEED MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page provided that:
Note: In the case of depressurization at altitudes higher than 37 000 ft (11 200 m), oxygen masks may
drop during the descent.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-00-01D AIR BLEED MAINTENANCE Message
Note: The use of the APU bleed air supply system for Main Engine Start is permitted.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to FCOM 3.02.36 (AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT procedure), and
‐ Refer to QRH 2.02 (AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT procedure)
(m) AIR BLEED MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page provided that it
is checked that the CFDS does not report a fault on a BMC or on a pylon leak detection loop.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 36-11-00-040-004
AIR BLEED MAINTENANCE message may be displayed on the STATUS SD page provided that:
36-00-01F
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
36-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
36-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
36-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
36-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
36-07-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
36-07-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative.
36-07-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative.
36-07-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative.
36-07-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
36-07-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
Note: The HP ground connection is near the engine 1 hazardous area. If the bleed air supply system 2 is inoperative, it
is better to use the APU bleed for engine start. If the APU bleed is not available, a ground cart can be used as long as
the pneumatic pipe is kept out of the hazardous area.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-11-01A Engine Bleed Air Supply System (Non-ETOPS flights)
FOR TAKEOFF
Consider selecting the air conditioning packs OFF or the APU bleed air supply system ON.
AFTER TAKEOFF
If the APU has been used to supply the air conditioning during the takeoff, set the APU BLEED pb-sw
to OFF.
IN FLIGHT
If Wing Anti-Ice is required:
PACK (affected side) pb-sw.......................................................................................OFF
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT
(o) For ETOPS, one may be inoperative for one flight provided that:
1) The APU bleed air supply system is operative, and
2) The APU is running throughout the flight, and
3) The associated ENG BLEED pb-sw is set to OFF, and
4) The X-BLEED selector is set to OPEN, and
5) The speedbrakes are operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-11-01B Engine Bleed Air Supply System (ETOPS flights)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
APU fuel consumption with the APU ON (APU GEN OFF and APU BLEED OFF):
APU ON (IDLE)
KG/H 80 60 42 28 24 22 20
BEFORE TAKEOFF
APU MASTER SW pb-sw.................................................................................................. ON
FOR TAKEOFF
Consider selecting the air conditioning packs OFF or the APU bleed air supply system ON.
AFTER TAKEOFF
If the APU has been used to supply the air conditioning during the takeoff, set the APU BLEED pb-sw
to OFF.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-11-01E Engine Bleed Air Supply System (Non-ETOPS flights)
FOR TAKEOFF
Consider selecting the air conditioning packs OFF or the APU bleed air supply system ON.
AFTER TAKEOFF
If the APU has been used to supply the air conditioning during the takeoff, set the APU BLEED pb-sw
to OFF.
IN FLIGHT
If Wing Anti-Ice is required:
PACK (affected side) pb-sw.......................................................................................OFF
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT
(o) For ETOPS, one may be inoperative for one flight provided that:
1) The APU bleed air supply system is operative, and
2) The APU is running throughout the flight, and
3) The associated ENG BLEED pb-sw is set to OFF, and
4) The X-BLEED selector is set to OPEN, and
5) The altitude is limited to 31 500 ft (9 600 m).
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-11-01F Engine Bleed Air Supply System (ETOPS flights)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
APU fuel consumption with the APU ON (APU GEN OFF and APU BLEED OFF):
APU ON (IDLE)
KG/H 80 60 42 28 24 22 20
BEFORE TAKEOFF
APU MASTER SW pb-sw.................................................................................................. ON
FOR TAKEOFF
Consider selecting the air conditioning packs OFF or the APU bleed air supply system ON.
AFTER TAKEOFF
If the APU has been used to supply the air conditioning during the takeoff, set the APU BLEED
pb-sw to OFF.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT
Note: The HP ground connection is near the engine 1 hazardous area. If the bleed air supply system 2 is inoperative, it
is better to use the APU bleed for engine start. If the APU bleed is not available, a ground cart can be used as long as
the pneumatic pipe is kept out of the hazardous area.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
FOR TAKEOFF
Consider selecting the air conditioning packs OFF or the APU bleed air supply system ON.
AFTER TAKEOFF
If the APU has been used to supply the air conditioning during the takeoff, set the APU BLEED pb-sw
to OFF.
IN FLIGHT
If Wing Anti-Ice is required:
PACK (affected side) pb-sw.......................................................................................OFF
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT
(o) For ETOPS, one may be inoperative for one flight provided that:
1) The APU bleed air supply system is operative, and
2) The APU is running throughout the flight, and
3) The associated ENG BLEED pb-sw is set to OFF, and
4) The X-BLEED selector is set to OPEN, and
5) The altitude is limited to 37 000 ft (11 200 m), and
6) The speedbrakes are operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-11-01D Engine Bleed Air Supply System (ETOPS flights)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
APU fuel consumption with the APU ON (APU GEN OFF and APU BLEED OFF):
APU ON (IDLE)
KG/H 80 60 42 28 24 22 20
BEFORE TAKEOFF
APU MASTER SW pb-sw.................................................................................................. ON
FOR TAKEOFF
Consider selecting the air conditioning packs OFF or the APU bleed air supply system ON.
AFTER TAKEOFF
If the APU has been used to supply the air conditioning during the takeoff, set the APU BLEED
pb-sw to OFF.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT
FOR TAKEOFF
Consider selecting the air conditioning packs OFF or the APU bleed air supply system ON.
AFTER TAKEOFF
If the APU has been used to supply the air conditioning during the takeoff, set the APU BLEED
pb-sw to OFF.
IN FLIGHT
If Wing Anti-Ice is required:
PACK (affected side) pb-sw.......................................................................................OFF
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT
(o) For ETOPS, one may be inoperative for one flight provided that:
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
APU fuel consumption with the APU ON (APU GEN OFF and APU BLEED OFF):
APU ON (IDLE)
KG/H 80 60 42 28 24 22 20
BEFORE TAKEOFF
APU MASTER SW pb-sw.................................................................................................. ON
FOR TAKEOFF
Consider selecting the air conditioning packs OFF or the APU bleed air supply system ON.
AFTER TAKEOFF
If the APU has been used to supply the air conditioning during the takeoff, set the APU BLEED pb-sw
to OFF.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT
Note: In the case of depressurization at altitudes higher than 37 000 ft (11 200 m), oxygen masks may
drop down during the descent.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-11-01G Engine Bleed Air Supply System (Non-ETOPS flights)
FOR TAKEOFF
Consider selecting the air conditioning packs OFF or the APU bleed air supply system ON.
AFTER TAKEOFF
If the APU has been used to supply the air conditioning during the takeoff, set the APU BLEED pb-sw
to OFF.
IN FLIGHT
If Wing Anti-Ice is required:
PACK (affected side) pb-sw.......................................................................................OFF
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT
(o) For ETOPS, one may be inoperative for one flight provided that:
Note: In the case of depressurization at altitudes higher than 37 000 ft (11 200 m), oxygen masks may
drop down during the descent.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-11-01H Engine Bleed Air Supply System (ETOPS flights)
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
APU fuel consumption with the APU ON (APU GEN OFF and APU BLEED OFF):
APU ON (IDLE)
KG/H 80 60 42 28 24 22 20
BEFORE TAKEOFF
APU MASTER SW pb-sw.................................................................................................. ON
FOR TAKEOFF
Consider selecting the air conditioning packs OFF or the APU bleed air supply system ON.
AFTER TAKEOFF
If the APU has been used to supply the air conditioning during the takeoff, set the APU BLEED pb-sw
to OFF.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT
36-11-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
1) The affected engine bleed valve is secured in the closed position, and
2) The associated bleed air supply system is considered inoperative.
One may be inoperative provided that the associated bleed air supply system is considered
inoperative.
36-11-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
One may be inoperative provided that the associated engine bleed air supply system is considered
inoperative.
36-11-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 Yes
One may be inoperative provided that the associated engine bleed air supply system is considered
inoperative.
Refer to Item 36-11-01 Engine Bleed Air Supply System
One may be inoperative provided that the associated engine bleed air supply system is considered
inoperative.
Refer to Item 36-11-01 Engine Bleed Air Supply System
DURING DESCENT
When the engines operate in idle thrust:
‐ ENG (affected side) BLEED pb-sw.................................................................................OFF
‐ X BLEED selector....................................................................................................... OPEN
One may be inoperative in the closed position provided that the associated engine bleed air supply
system is considered inoperative.
36-11-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
O
ne may be inoperative provided that the associated engine bleed air supply system is considered
inoperative.
36-12-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that the APU BLEED pb-sw is set to OFF.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM task
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-12-02B APU Bleed Valve
ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT
When the APU runs:
APU BLEED pb-sw..........................................................................................................ON
36-12-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the APU bleed air supply system is considered inoperative.
36-12-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) May be inoperative provided that the manual control is checked operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-12-04A Automatic control of the X Bleed Valve
36-22-01B No FL limitation
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-22-01B Pylon Leak Detection System
Applicable to: RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
Note: The use of the APU bleed air supply system for Main Engine Start is permitted.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-22-01C Pylon Leak Detection System
Applicable to: RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995 and RP-C8996
Note: The use of the APU bleed air supply system for Main Engine Start is permitted.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT.
36-22-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 36-22-00-040-001
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-22-01B Pylon Leak Detection System
Note: The use of the APU bleed air supply system for Main Engine Start is permitted.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT.
Note: The use of the APU bleed air supply system for Main Engine Start is permitted.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT.
36-22-01D No FL limitation
Note: In the case of depressurization at altitudes higher than 37 000 ft (11 200 m), oxygen masks may
drop down during the descent.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 36-22-01D Pylon Leak Detection System
Note: The use of the APU bleed air supply system for Main Engine Start is permitted.
IN FLIGHT
In the case of failure of the remaining engine bleed air supply system, or in the case of
failure of the associated engine:
‐ Apply the associated ECAM procedure, then
‐ Refer to QRH/ABN-36 AIR DUAL BLEED FAULT.
36-22-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
Must be operative.
Note: Failure of one loop in one or both wing leading edges is indicated by a
MAINTENANCE message displayed on the STATUS SD page.
36-22-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative.
46-11-01A
Reserved
46-21-01A
Reserved
46-21-02A
Reserved
46-21-03A
Reserved
49-00-01A
49-01-01A
May be inoperative provided that the N and the EGT indications are operative on the APU SD page.
49-01-02A
May be inoperative.
49-01-03A
May be inoperative provided that the N indication is operative on the APU SD page.
49-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
49-07-01A
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 49-10-01A Power Plant (APU)
GENERAL INFORMATION
No APU bleed air will be available for Main Engine Start (MES) or air conditioning.
No electrical power will be available from the APU generator.
(o) May be inoperative for four flights provided that ETOPS beyond 120 min is not conducted.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 49-10-01B Power Plant (APU)
GENERAL INFORMATION
No APU bleed air will be available for Main Engine Start (MES) or air conditioning.
No electrical power will be available from the APU generator.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 49-10-01C Power Plant (APU)
GENERAL INFORMATION
No APU bleed air will be available for Main Engine Start (MES) or air conditioning.
No electrical power will be available from the APU generator.
May be inoperative in the closed position provided that the APU is not used.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM task
52 Doors
52-01-01-01 CHAN (1, 2) LEDs on the CKPT DOOR CONT Overhead Panel
Applicable to: ALL
52-01-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
May be inoperative provided associated FAULT light is verified to operate normally.
52-01-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 3 – –
Reserved
52-01-01-03 Pressure Rate Sensor on the CKPT DOOR CONT Overhead Panel
Applicable to: ALL
52-01-02-01 CHAN (1, 2) LEDs on the CKPT DOOR CONT BK UP Overhead Panel
Applicable to: RP-C8990 and RP-C8995
(o) One or both may be inoperative provided that the CTL pb FAULT light is checked operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-01-02-01A CHAN (1, 2) LEDs on the CKPT DOOR CONT BK UP Overhead Panel
Refer to Item 52-51-02 CDLS BK UP System (Back-up Control Unit, CTL pb and Lights on the CKPT
DOOR BK UP Panel)
(o) One or more may be inoperative provided that the CTL pb FAULT light is checked operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-01-02-02A STRIKE (TOP, MID, BOT) LEDs on the CKPT DOOR CONT BK UP
Overhead Panel
One or more may be inoperative provided that the CDLS back-up system is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-51-02 CDLS BK UP System (Back-up Control Unit, CTL pb and Lights on the CKPT
DOOR BK UP Panel)
(m) One may be inoperative for 60 consecutive calendar days provided that the remaining pressure
rate sensor is checked operative.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 52-51-00-040-012
Both may be inoperative provided that the CDLS back-up system is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-51-02 CDLS BK UP System (Back-up Control Unit, CTL pb and Lights on the CKPT
DOOR BK UP Panel)
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-01-03-01A CTL pb FAULT light on the CKPT DOOR BK UP Overhead
Panel
52-01-03-01B ‘D’ repair interval and CDLS back-up system considered inoperative
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that the CDLS back-up system is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-51-02 CDLS BK UP System (Back-up Control Unit, CTL pb and Lights on
the CKPT DOOR BK UP Panel)
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-01-03-02A CTL pb OPEN light on the CKPT DOOR BK UP Overhead Panel
52-01-03-02B ‘D’ repair interval and CDLS back-up system considered inoperative
May be inoperative provided that the CDLS back-up system is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-51-02 CDLS BK UP System (Back-up Control Unit, CTL pb and Lights on
the CKPT DOOR BK UP Panel)
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-01-03-31A CTL pb on the CKPT DOOR BK UP Overhead Panel
‐ Manual opening from the cockpit has to be performed by the cockpit crew.
‐ Procedure must be established to restrict cockpit access to the strict necessary.
52-01-03-31B ‘D’ repair interval and CDLS back-up system considered inoperative
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative provided that the CDLS back-up system is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-51-02 CDLS BK UP System (Back-up Control Unit, CTL pb and Lights on
the CKPT DOOR BK UP Panel)
52-01-03-32A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the CDLS back-up system is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-51-02 CDLS BK UP System (Back-up Control Unit, CTL pb and Lights on the CKPT
DOOR BK UP Panel)
52-01-03-33A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the CDLS normal system is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-51-01 CDLS Normal System (Normal Control Unit, Switch and Lights on the CKPT
DOOR Panel, Buzzer, Keypad)
52-01-03-34A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 No
Note: For maintenance purpose only, the CDLS normal and the CDLS back-up systems can be
deactivated by performing the associated maintenance procedure.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 52-51-00-040-008
(o) One or more may be permanently indicated open when actually closed provided that:
1) The associated door is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight, and
2) The white SLIDE ARMED light on the associated door does not come on when the door is
closed and locked and the slide arming lever is in the armed position.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-01A Passenger Door/Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Open on the
DOOR/OXY SD page (SLIDE ARMED light operative)
GENERAL INFORMATION
If passenger doors are affected, indications on the PTP or the FAP* may be affected.
If passenger doors are affected, the time recorded in the ACARS movement report may be wrong.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb.........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . . TEST"
line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
(o) One or more may be permanently indicated open when actually closed provided that the
associated door is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-01B Passenger Door/Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Open
on the DOOR/OXY SD page (SLIDE ARMED light may be permanently illuminated)
GENERAL INFORMATION
If passenger doors are affected, indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
If passenger doors are affected, the time recorded in the ACARS movement report may be wrong.
The SLIDE ARMED light on passenger doors may be permanently illuminated.
Note: the limitation MAX FL : 100/MEA remains displayed on the STATUS SD page.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb...........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . .TEST"
line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
(o) One or more may be permanently indicated open when actually closed provided that:
1) The aircraft is not operated at night, and
2) The associated door is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-01C Passenger Door/Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Open on the
DOOR/OXY SD page (SLIDE ARMED light may be permanently illuminated)
GENERAL INFORMATION
If passenger doors are affected, indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
If passenger doors are affected, the time recorded in the ACARS movement report may be wrong.
The SLIDE ARMED light on passenger doors may be permanently illuminated.
Note: the limitation MAX FL : 100/MEA remains displayed on the STATUS SD page.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb...........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . . TEST"
line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the T.O
CONFIG TEST.
(o) One or more may be permanently indicated open when actually closed provided that:
1) The associated door is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight, and
2) The slide of the associated door is not armed, and
3) The associated door is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-01 Cabin Passenger Door
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-01D Passenger Door/Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Open on the
DOOR/OXY SD page (SLIDE ARMED light may be permanently illuminated)
GENERAL INFORMATION
If passenger doors are affected, indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
If passenger doors are affected, the time recorded in the ACARS movement report may be wrong.
The SLIDE ARMED light on passenger doors may be permanently illuminated.
Note: the limitation MAX FL : 100/MEA remains displayed on the STATUS SD page.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb...........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . .
TEST" line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
(o) One or more may be permanently indicated closed when actually open provided that:
1) The aircraft is not operated at night, and
2) The associated door is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-02A Passenger Door/Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated
Closed on the DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
If passenger doors are affected, indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
If passenger doors are affected, the time recorded in the ACARS movement report may be wrong.
(o) One or more may be permanently indicated closed when actually open provided that:
1) The associated door is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight, and
2) The associated door is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 52-10-01 Cabin Passenger Door
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-02B Passenger Door/Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Closed on the
DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
If passenger doors are affected, indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
If passenger doors are affected, the time recorded in the ACARS movement report may be wrong.
(o) (m) One or more may be permanently indicated open when actually closed provided that:
1) The associated exit is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight, and
2) The associated SLIDE indication is displayed in white on the DOOR/OXY SD page.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-03A Overwing Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Open on the
DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
Indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
Note: the limitation MAX FL : 100/MEA remains displayed on the STATUS SD page.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb.........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . .
TEST" line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
(o) (m) One or more may be permanently indicated open when actually closed provided that the
associated exit is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-03B Overwing Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Open on the
DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
Indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
Note: the limitation MAX FL : 100/MEA remains displayed on the STATUS SD page.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb.........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . .
TEST" line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
(o) (m) One or more may be permanently indicated open when actually closed provided that:
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-03C Overwing Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Open on the
DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
Indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
Note: the limitation MAX FL : 100/MEA remains displayed on the STATUS SD page.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb.........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . .
TEST" line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
(o) (m) One or more may be permanently indicated open when actually closed provided that:
1) The associated exit is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight, and
2) Both exits on the same side are considered inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-03D Overwing Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Open on the
DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
Indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
Note: the limitation MAX FL : 100/MEA remains displayed on the STATUS SD page.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb.........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . .
TEST" line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
(o) (m) One or both may be permanently indicated open when actually closed provided that:
1) The associated exit is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight, and
2) The relevant SLIDE indication on the DOOR/OXY SD page is normally displayed in white.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-03A Overwing Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Open on the
DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
Indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
Note: the limitation MAX FL : 100/MEA remains displayed on the STATUS SD page.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb.........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . .
TEST" line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
(o) (m) One or both may be permanently indicated open when actually closed provided that the
associated exit is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-03B Overwing Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Open on the
DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
Indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
Note: the limitation MAX FL : 100/MEA remains displayed on the STATUS SD page.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐
T.O CONFIG pb.........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . .
TEST" line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
(o) (m) One or both may be permanently indicated open when actually closed provided that:
1) The aircraft is not operated at night, and
2) The associated exit is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-03C Overwing Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Open on the
DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
Indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
Note: the limitation MAX FL : 100/MEA remains displayed on the STATUS SD page.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb.........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . .
TEST" line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
(o) (m) One or both may be permanently indicated open when actually closed provided that:
1) The associated exit is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight, and
2) The associated exit is considered inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-03D Overwing Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Open on the
DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
Indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
Note: the limitation MAX FL : 100/MEA remains displayed on the STATUS SD page.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb.........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . .
TEST" line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
(o) (m) One or more may be permanently indicated closed when actually open provided that:
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-04A Overwing Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Closed on the DOOR/OXY
SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
Indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
(o) (m) One or more may be permanently indicated closed when actually open provided that:
1) The associated exit is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight, and
2) Both exits on the same side are considered inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-04B Overwing Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Closed on the DOOR/OXY
SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
Indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
(o) (m) One or more may be permanently indicated closed when actually open provided that:
1) The aircraft is not operated at night, and
2) The associated exit is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight.
(o) OpsProc 52-07-04A Overwing Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Closed on the DOOR/OXY
SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
Indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
(o) (m) One or more may be permanently indicated closed when actually open provided that:
1) The associated exit is visually checked to be closed and locked before each flight, and
2) The associated exit is considered inoperative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-04B Overwing Emergency Exit Permanently Indicated Closed on the DOOR/OXY
SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
Indications on the PTP or the FAP * may be affected.
52-07-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
(o) (m) One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated door is visually checked to be
closed and locked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-05A Cargo Door Indication on the DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
If cargo indication is inoperative due to a proximity switch failure:
The relevant cargo heating* is inhibited. For live animal transportation, use the Live Animal
Transportation Calculation Tool.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb..........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . .
TEST" line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
52-07-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
(o) (m) One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated door is visually checked to be
closed and locked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-07-06A Avionics Compartment Access Door Indication on the
DOOR/OXY SD page
GENERAL INFORMATION
If cargo indication is inoperative due to a proximity switch failure:
The relevant cargo heating* is inhibited. For livestock transportation refer to livestock
transportation manual.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
CAUTION The T.O CONFIG pb must be maintained pressed to check that there is no alert.
‐ T.O CONFIG pb..........................................................................................................Press
In the T.O MEMO, the "T.O CONFIG NORMAL" line will not replace the "T.O CONFIG . .
TEST" line.
‐ Consider normal configuration for takeoff provided that no alert was displayed during the
T.O CONFIG TEST.
52-10-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 3 No
AFT 22-25
AFT 24-28
52-10-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 – No
(m) One Overwing Emergency Exit and/or its slide may be inoperative provided:
1) The maximum numbers of passenger are reduced by 30 for 168 to180 configurations.
2) Both overwing emergency exits are operative, and
3) All remaining door are capable of being operated in the emergency mode, and
4) It is positively established that the inoperative exit is safe to fly either at maximum differential
pressure or completely unpressurized, and
5) Tapes or ropes are used to block the exit and will be installed prior to passenger boarding. The
tapes or ropes shall be of conspicuous color and,
6) Emergency exit sign/light associated with the inoperative exit must be covered to obscure the
sign/light and a placard attached to indicate “NO EXIT” and,
7) The Captain of the aircraft must ensure that prior to commencement of the flight, the cabin staff have
been briefed on the situation and how it affects their emergency evacuation procedures, and
8) During the pre takeoff briefing of the passenger by the cabin staff, the inoperative exit MUST NOT
be included in the exit location briefing, and
9) Restricted seating areas are clearly indicated with placard or tape barrier.
52-10-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
52-10-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
A maximum of one per exit may be inoperative provided that the flight is not pressurized.
52-10-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 4 0 No
52-10-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 4 – No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the affected door is considered inoperative.
52-10-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 4 0 No
(m) One or more messages may be displayed provided that the door bottle pressure is checked on the
associated bottle pressure gauge before the first MEL dispatch and then every 8 days.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 52-00-00-040-001
52-10-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 4 0 No
(m) One or more messages may be displayed provided that the door bottle pressure is checked on the
associated bottle pressure gauge before the first MEL dispatch and then every 8 days.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 52-00-00-040-003
52-10-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
– 4 – No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the affected door is considered inoperative.
52-10-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 No
One or more may be inoperative in the closed and locked position provided that they are
indicated locked on the DOOR/OXY SD page.
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated cargo doors can be operated
using the hand pump.
Refer to Item 52-30-01 Cargo Door (FWD, AFT and BULK ( If Installed))
52-30-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
A maximum of one locking hook or one spool per cargo door may be inoperative provided
that:
1) All the others have no damage, and
2) The flight is not pressurized.
52-30-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
May be inoperative provided that the integrity of the yellow hydraulic system is not affected.
One or both on each cargo door may be inoperative for one flight.
(o) One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated cargo door is in the fully open
position during loading and unloading operations.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-30-07A Cargo Door Open/Locked Indicator light
ON GROUND
When the Cargo Door Open/Locked Indicator light is inoperative, it is necessary to inform
the ground personnel:
‐ To visually check that the affected cargo door is in the fully open position, with no
downward movement after releasing the lever of the manual selector valve.
‐ To visually check that the lever of the manual selector valve stays in the neutral
position.
52-33-01A
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 52-33-00-040-001
52-51-01B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
(o) OpsProc 52-51-01B CDLS Normal System (Normal Control Unit, Switch and Lights on the CKPT
DOOR Panel, Buzzer, Keypad)
Applicable to: RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8989, RP-C8991, RP-C8993 and RP-C8994
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-51-01A CDLS Normal System (Normal Control Unit, Switch and Lights on the CKPT
DOOR Panel, Buzzer, Keypad)
Alternate normal procedures must be established before departure in order to remind the cabin crew to
use the cabin interphone to communicate with the cockpit crew to request access to the cockpit.
IN FLIGHT
At least two people must always be present in the cockpit throughout the entire flight.
52-51-01B
Reserved
52-51-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 1 0 Yes
May be inoperative.
52-51-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
At least two people must be always present in the cockpit throughout the entire flight.
52-51-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 Yes
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 52-51-04A CDLS Keypad
IN FLIGHT
At least two people must always be present in the cockpit throughout the entire flight.
52-51-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(o) May be inoperative provided alternate procedures are established and used.
At least two people must be always present in the cockpit throughout the entire flight.
52-51-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 3 2 No
(m) Note: Apply the maintenance procedure only when the inoperative door release strike is failed in
the locked position.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 52-51-00-040-010
52-51-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 1 0 NO
May be inoperative provided for 30 calendar days provided the interphone system between the cabin
and the cockpit is operative.
52-53-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
At least two people must be always present in the cockpit throughout the entire flight.
52-53-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative provided The Interphone system between the cabin and the cockpit is operative
At least two people must be always present in the cockpit throughout the entire flight.
52-53-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
At least two people must be always present in the cockpit throughout the entire flight.
52-53-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 1 0 No
(o) May be inoperative provided The Interphone system between the cabin and the cockpit is operative
At least two people must be always present in the cockpit throughout the entire flight.
MI-56 Windows
MI-56-10 Cockpit
56-10-01 Front Windshield
56-10-02 Lateral Fixed/Sliding Window
56-10-03 Sliding Window Opening/Closing Mechanism
MI-56-20 Cabin
56-20-01 Cabin Window
56-10 – Cockpit
Note: A cockpit window with minor damages (as described in the associated maintenance
procedure) is considered operative, but the vision through this cockpit window must be
acceptable to the flight crew.
________________________________________________________________________________________
56-10-01A For SPS Windshields (Except P/N STA320-1-3-1 and STA320-2-3-1) and for
PPG Windshields and for PAL Windshields (Only P/N PAL 06282 & 06283)
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 2 2 No
(o) (m) One front windshield external ply may be cracked for ten flights provided that:
1) The other front windshield is not damaged, and
2) The associated windshield heating is deactivated, and
3) The visibility through the associated front windshield is acceptable to the flight crew, and
4) The aircraft is not operated in known or forecast icing conditions.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 56-10-01A Front Windshield
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
When PF side is affected:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1
When PNF side is affected:
Maximum landing capability is not affected and is still CAT 3 DUAL.
56-10-01B For SPS Windshields (Except P/N STA320-1-3-1 and STA320-2-3-1) and for
PPG Windshields and for PAL Windshields (Only P/N PAL 06282 & 06283)
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 2 No
(o) (m) One front windshield may have burn spots in the bus bar area beyond the limits provided that:
1) The other front windshield is not damaged, and
2) The associated windshield heating is deactivated, and
3) The visibility through the associated front windshield is acceptable to the flight crew, and
4) The aircraft is not operated in known or forecast icing conditions.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 56-10-01B Front Windshield
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
When PF side is affected:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1
When PNF side is affected:
Maximum landing capability is not affected and is still CAT 3 DUAL.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
When PF side is affected:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1
When PNF side is affected:
Maximum landing capability is not affected and is still CAT 3 DUAL.
(m) Refer to AMM 56-10-00-040-001
(o) (m) One front windshield may have burn spots in the bus bar area beyond the limits provided that:
1) The other front windshield is not damaged, and
2) The associated windshield heating is deactivated, and
3) The visibility through the associated front windshield is acceptable to the flight crew, and
4) The aircraft is not operated in known or forecast icing conditions.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 56-10-01D Front Windshield
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
When PF side is affected:
Maximum landing capability is CAT 1
When PNF side is affected:
Maximum landing capability is not affected and is still CAT 3 DUAL.
Note: A cockpit window with minor damages (as described in the associated maintenance
procedure) is considered operative, but the vision through this cockpit window must be
acceptable to the flight crew.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
56-10-02A For Acrylic Window (LUCAS/ACT Supplier, P/N starting with NH)
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 4 No
(m) One or more lateral windows may have burn spots in the bus bar area provided that:
1) The diameter of the mark is less than 10 mm, and
2) The associated lateral window heating is deactivated, and
3) The visibility through the affected lateral window is acceptable to the flight crew.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 56-10-00-040-002
56-10-02B For Glass Window (SPS Supplier (P/N starting with SPS) and PPG Supplier
(P/N starting with NP))
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 4 4 No
(m) External ply may be cracked for one flight provided that:
1) The other lateral windows are not damaged, and
2) The associated lateral window heating is deactivated, and
3) The visibility through the affected lateral window is acceptable to the flight crew.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 56-10-00-040-002
56-10-02C For Glass Window (SPS Supplier (P/N starting with SPS) and PPG Supplier
(P/N starting with NP))
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 4 No
(m) One or more lateral windows may have burn spots in the bus bar area provided that:
1) The diameter of the mark is less than 10 mm, and
2) The associated lateral window heating is deactivated, and
3) The visibility through the affected lateral window is acceptable to the flight crew.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM 56-10-00-040-002
56-20 - Cabin
56-20-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – 0 No
One or more may be cracked provided that the flight is not pressurized.
MI-70 Engine
70-00-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
70-00-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
70-00-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C – – No
MI-73-10 Distribution
73-10-04 Engine HP Fuel Valve
MI-73-20 Controlling
73-20-01 Flex Takeoff Mode
73-20-04 EPR Control Mode
73-20-05 Minimum Idle on Ground
73-20-06 EEC ACFT 28V Power Supply
One may be inoperative provided that the fuel quantity indications of the associated tanks
are operative on the FUEL SD page.
73-07-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
73-08-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
73-09-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
73-10 - Distribution
73-10-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
73-20 – Controlling
73-20-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
D 2 0 No
May be inoperative on one or both engines provided that the maximum thrust is used for takeoff.
73-20-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(o) The EPR control mode may be inoperative on one or both engines provided that:
1) ETOPS is not conducted, and
2) The N1 rated control mode is operative on both engines (ENG 1(2) N1 DEGRADED
MODE message is not displayed on the STATUS SD page), and
3) The Flight Manual performance penalties are applied.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 73-20-04A EPR Control Mode
GENERAL INFORMATION
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Takeoff performance:
The following method may be used for takeoff performance determination if no takeoff data
(Predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program with present failure case
taken into account) is available.
Method:
‐ Determine the MTOW and the associated speeds in normal conditions.
‐ Apply the following decrements function of the MTOW in normal conditions:
Check that the takeoff speeds are equal to or above the minimum control speeds.
If no minimum speed value is available on the RTOW charts, use the conservative values
provided in Refer to FCOM/PER-TOF-TOD-25-20 MINIMUM V2 LIMITED BY VMU/VMCA (KT IAS).
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW chart
(due to VMCG limitation).
Check that the corrected VR is equal to or above the minimum VR value shown on the RTOW chart
(due to VMCA limitation).
Check that the corrected V2 is equal to or above the minimum V2 value shown on the RTOW chart
(due to VMU/VMCA limitation).
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
‐ Determine V1, VR and V2 for the MTOW
‐ Decrease V1, VR and V2 by 1.3 kt per 1 000 kg (0.6 kt per 1 000 lb) difference
between the MTOW and the actual TOW
V1, VR, and V2 must not decrease below the minimum speeds defined above.
Go-Around performance:
See "N1 MODE THRUST CONTROL" in Refer to FCOM/PER-THR-N1 MODE THRUST CONTROL.
FOR TAKEOFF
Flexible takeoff is not permitted.
GENERAL INFORMATION
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Takeoff performance:
The following method may be used for takeoff performance determination if no takeoff data
(Predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program with present failure case
taken into account) is available.
Method:
‐ Determine the MTOW and the associated speeds in normal conditions.
‐ Apply the following decrements function of the MTOW in normal conditions:
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW chart
(due to VMCG limitation).
Check that the corrected VR is equal to or above the minimum VR value shown on the RTOW chart
(due to VMCA limitation).
Check that the corrected V2 is equal to or above the minimum V2 value shown on the RTOW chart
(due to VMCA limitation).
Check that the corrected V2 is equal to or above the minimum V2 due to VMU limitation.
Refer to FCOM/PER-TOF-TOD-25-20 MINIMUM V2 LIMITED BY VMU/VMCA (KT IAS).
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
The speeds determined without failure and associated with the actual TOW may be retained
provided that they are all lower than the speeds calculated using above method.
Go-Around performance:
See "N1 MODE THRUST CONTROL" in Refer to FCOM/PER-THR-N1 MODE THRUST CONTROL.
FOR TAKEOFF
Flexible takeoff is not permitted.
GENERAL INFORMATION
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Takeoff performance:
The following method may be used for takeoff performance determination if no takeoff data
(Predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program with present failure
case taken into account) is available.
Method:
‐ Determine the MTOW and the associated speeds in normal conditions.
‐ Apply the following decrements function of the MTOW in normal conditions:
Check that the takeoff speeds are equal to or above the minimum control speeds.
If no minimum speed value is available on the RTOW charts, use the conservative values
provided in Refer to FCOM/PER-TOF-TOD-25-20 MINIMUM V2 LIMITED BY VMU/VMCA (KT IAS).
Check that the corrected V1 is equal to or above the minimum V1 value shown on the RTOW chart
(due to VMCG limitation).
Check that the corrected VR is equal to or above the minimum VR value shown on the RTOW chart
(due to VMCA limitation).
Check that the corrected V2 is equal to or above the minimum V2 value shown on the RTOW chart
(due to VMU/VMCA limitation).
If the actual TOW is lower than the MTOW calculated using above method:
‐ Determine V1, VR and V2 for the MTOW
‐ Decrease V1, VR and V2 by 1.3 kt per 1 000 kg (0.6 kt per 1 000 lb) difference between
the MTOW and the actual TOW
V1, VR, and V2 must not decrease below the minimum speeds defined above.
Go-Around performance:
See "N1 MODE THRUST CONTROL" in Refer to FCOM/PER-THR-N1 MODE THRUST CONTROL.
FOR TAKEOFF
Flexible takeoff is not permitted.
Note: CLB or LVR CLB will not flash on the FMA as the A/THR is not available.
GO-AROUND
When appropriate:
‐ Set both FDs to ON (basic guidance modes engage)
‐ Engage OP CLB and select appropriate speed and lateral mode
‐ AP use as required.
Note: CLB or LVR CLB will not flash on the FMA as the A/THR is not available. FMS does not
engage the GO AROUND phase.
73-20-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(o) One or both may be inoperative provided that the Flight Manual performance penalties are applied.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 73-20-05A Minimum Idle on Ground
GENERAL INFORMATION
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Takeoff performance:
Use the following penalties for takeoff performance determination if no takeoff data
(predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program with present failure case
taken into account) is available. Takeoff must be performed with full thrust.
Landing performance:
No penalty.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Takeoff performance:
Use the following penalties for takeoff performance determination if no takeoff data
(predetermined by using OCTOPUS program or other equivalent program with present failure case
taken into account) is available. Takeoff must be performed with full thrust.
Landing performance:
No penalty.
73-20-06A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 2 No
MI-74 Ignition
74-07-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 No
(o) One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated ENG 1(2) IGN A(B)(A+B)
FAULT alert is checked operative.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 74-07-01A Selected Igniter Indication on the ENGINE SD page
If engine 2 is affected:
‐ ENGINE/1 AND 2/IGN/SYS A (49VU A03) C/B.................................................................PULL
‐ ENGINE/IGN/ENG 2/ SYS A BAT (121VU P40) C/B.........................................................PULL
‐ ENGINE/IGN/ENG 2/ SYS B (121VU P42) C/B.................................................................PULL
On the EWD, check that the ENG 1(2) A+B IGN FAULT alert is displayed.
If engine 1 is affected:
‐ ENGINE/1 AND 2/IGN/SYS A (49VU A03) C/B................................................................PUSH
‐ ENGINE/IGN/ENG 1/ SYS A BAT (121VU P39) C/B........................................................PUSH
‐ ENGINE/IGN/ENG 1/ SYS B (121VU P41) C/B................................................................PUSH
If engine 2 is affected:
‐ ENGINE/1 AND 2/IGN/SYS A (49VU A03) C/B................................................................PUSH
‐ ENGINE/IGN/ENG 2/ SYS A BAT (121VU P40) C/B........................................................PUSH
‐ ENGINE/IGN/ENG 2/ SYS B (121VU P42) C/B................................................................PUSH
74-09-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 2 No
74-31-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
74-31-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
76-11-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 4 3 No
One may be inoperative on one engine for three days provided that:
1) The A/THR is operative, and
2) Both LGCIUs are operative, and
3) The L/G shock absorbers proximity detectors are operative.
77-07-01-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 77-07-02-05 N1 Vibration Indication on the ENGINE SD page
77-07-01-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 77-07-02-06 N2 Vibration Indication on the ENGINE SD page
77-07-01-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 73-07-01 Fuel Used Indication on the ENGINE SD page
77-07-01-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 79-07-03 Oil Quantity Indication on the ENGINE SD page
77-07-02-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 36-07-04 Engine Bleed Precooler Inlet Pressure Indication on the BLEED SD page
77-07-02-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 73-07-02 Fuel Filter CLOG Indication on the ENGINE SD page
77-07-02-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 73-07-01 Fuel Used Indication on the ENGINE SD page
77-07-02-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
77-07-02-07A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 79-07-01 CLOG Indication on the ENGINE SD page
77-07-02-08A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 79-07-02 Oil Pressure Indication and Advisory on the ENGINE SD page
77-07-02-09A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 79-07-03 Oil Quantity Indication on the ENGINE SD page
77-07-02-10A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 79-07-04 Oil Temperature Indication on the ENGINE SD page
77-07-02-11A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 74-07-01 Selected Igniter Indication on the ENGINE SD page
77-07-02-12A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 80-07-01 Start Valve Position Indication on the ENGINE SD page
77-08-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
Must be operative.
77-08-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 73-20-04 EPR Control Mode
77-08-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- - - -
Refer to Item 73-08-01 Fuel Flow Indication on the EWD
77-08-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
Must be operative.
77-08-05A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
Must be operative.
MI-78 Exhaust
78-08-01B
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated thrust reverser is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 78-30-01 Thrust Reverser
78-30-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Performance Adjustments:
Performance Adjustments
Runway State
Takeoff Dry, or
No performance adjustments necessary (basic
Landing Dry, or
performance data is computed without thrust reversers).
Both Thrust Landing Wet
Reversers
Inoperative Takeoff Wet, or
Use performance data computed with all thrust
Takeoff Contaminated, or
reversers inoperative.
Landing Contaminated
REJECTED TAKEOFF
Ensure that both engine thrust levers are set to IDLE detent, then:
If one thrust reverser is inoperative:
Use both thrust levers when applying reverse thrust.
Note:
If the affected engine is not fitted with the EEC Software standard SCN21:
ENG (AFFECTED SIDE) REVERSER FAULT alert is displayed on the EWD
after selection of the reverse thrust.
If both thrust reversers are inoperative:
Do not move the thrust levers to reverse.
IN FLIGHT
Should a failure occur with "LDG DIST PROC.......APPLY" message displayed on the
STATUS SD page,
and
Whatever the actual thrust reversers selection at landing:
To calculate the LDG DIST with the in-flight failure, use, as a conservative approach, the
LDG DIST factors "WITHOUT REV" (Refer to QRH/ABN-80 Miscellaneous-LDG CONF/APP
SPD/LDG DIST FOLLOWING FAILURES).
DURING APPROACH
During the approach briefing, the flight crew must review:
‐ The status of the thrust reversers, and
‐ The use of the thrust reversers
FOR LANDING
Before the touchdown, ensure that both engine thrust levers are set to IDLE detent for the flare.
After touchdown, if one thrust reverser is inoperative:
Use both thrust levers when applying reverse thrust.
For automatic roll-out with one thrust reverser inoperative, Refer to AFM/LIM-22-FGS CAT II /
CAT III Operations.
Note:
o If the affected engine is not fitted with the EEC Software standard SCN21:
ENG (AFFECTED SIDE) REVERSER FAULT alert is displayed on the EWD
after selection of the reverse thrust.
Applicable to: RP-C8993, RP-C8994, RP-C8995, RP-C8992, RP-C8897, RP-C8988, RP-C8989 and
RP-C8991
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Performance Adjustments:
FOR TAKEOFF
During the takeoff briefing, the flight crew must review:
‐ The status of the thrust reversers, and
‐ The use of the thrust reversers
REJECTED TAKEOFF
Ensure that both engine thrust levers are set to IDLE detent, then:
If one thrust reverser is inoperative:
Use both thrust levers when applying reverse thrust.
Note:
o If the affected engine is not fitted with the EEC Software standard SCN21:
ENG (AFFECTED SIDE) REVERSER FAULT alert is displayed on the EWD
after selection of the reverse thrust.
If both thrust reversers are inoperative:
Do not move the thrust levers to reverse.
DURING APPROACH
During the approach briefing, the flight crew must review:
‐ The status of the thrust reversers, and
‐ The use of the thrust reversers
FOR LANDING
Before the touchdown, ensure that both engine thrust levers are set to IDLE detent for the flare.
After touchdown, if one thrust reverser is inoperative:
Use both thrust levers when applying reverse thrust.
Note:
o If the affected engine is not fitted with the EEC Software standard SCN21:
ENG (AFFECTED SIDE) REVERSER FAULT alert is displayed on the EWD
after selection of the reverse thrust.
FLIGHT PREPARATION/LIMITATIONS
Performance Adjustments:
REJECTED TAKEOFF
Ensure that both engine thrust levers are set to IDLE detent, then:
If one thrust reverser is inoperative:
Use both thrust levers when applying reverse thrust.
Note: ENG (AFFECTED SIDE) REVERSER FAULT alert is displayed on the EWD after
selection of the reverse thrust.
If both thrust reversers are inoperative:
Do not move the thrust levers to reverse.
IN FLIGHT
Should a failure occur with "LDG DIST PROC.......APPLY" message displayed on the
STATUS SD page,
and
Whatever the actual thrust reversers selection at landing:
To calculate the LDG DIST with the in-flight failure, use, as a conservative approach, the
LDG DIST factors "WITHOUT REV" (Refer to QRH/ABN-80 Miscellaneous-LDG CONF/APP
SPD/LDG DIST FOLLOWING FAILURES).
DURING APPROACH
During the approach briefing, the flight crew must review:
‐ The status of the thrust reversers, and
‐ The use of the thrust reversers
FOR LANDING
Before the touchdown, ensure that both engine thrust levers are set to IDLE detent for the flare.
After touchdown, if one thrust reverser is inoperative:
Use both thrust levers when applying reverse thrust.
Note: ENG (AFFECTED SIDE) REVERSER FAULT alert is displayed on the EWD after
selection of the reverse thrust.
After touchdown, if both thrust reversers are inoperative:
Do not move the thrust levers to reverse.
78-30-02A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 4 0 No
One or more may be inoperative provided that the associated thrust reverser is considered inoperative.
Refer to Item 78-30-01 Thrust Reverser
78-30-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
MI-79 Oil
MI-79-20 Distribution
79-20-01 Air Cooled Oil Cooler (ACOC) Modulating Valve
79-07-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
Note: Simultaneous illumination of the BLUE ELEC PUMP pb-sw FAULT light and the ENG 1(2)
PUMP pb-sw FAULT light with engines off may be due to a failed engine oil low pressure
switch. In this case, the ENG 1(2) OIL LO PR alert is inoperative.
Refer to Item 79-09-01 ENG 1(2) OIL LO PR Alert
_____________________________________________________________________________________
79-07-02C
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
79-07-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
(m) One may be inoperative provided that the associated oil quantity is checked before each flight.
Reference(s)
(m) Refer to AMM task
79-07-04A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
- 2 2 No
Must be operative.
Issued Date: 14 Feb 2012 Doc. Ref. ZA-ME-M-003A
Revision Number: 00 Control Page: MI79 - 2
A319/A320 Issue 3
MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
MEL ITEMS 79 – OIL
79-09-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
79-09-03A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
A 2 0 No
One or both may be displayed for 3 days provided that the ENG 1(2) BEARING 4 OIL SYS alert is not
associated with the HI PRESS message.
79-20 - Distribution
79-20-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(o) One or both may be inoperative in the open position provided that the fuel temperature in the inner
tank is checked to be above -20 °C.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 79-20-01A Air Cooled Oil Cooler (ACOC) Modulating Valve
BEFORE TAKEOFF
On the FUEL SD page, check that the fuel temperature in the inner tank is above -20 °C.
MI-80 Starting
80-01-31A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
80-07-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 No
(m) One or both may be inoperative provided that the associated start valve is checked closed
after the start of the affected engine.
Reference(s)
80-11-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 1 No
(o) (m) One may be inoperative provided that the start valve is manually closed after the start of the
affected engine.
Reference(s)
(o) OpsProc 80-11-01A Start Valve
80-12-01A
Repair interval Nbr Installed Nbr required Placard
C 2 0 Yes
• Performance:
The following performance penalties are applicable per missing flap:
‐ Takeoff and approach climb performance limiting weights are reduced by 190 kg
(418 lb)
‐ En route performance limiting weight is reduced by 216 kg (476 lb)
‐ Fuel consumption is increased by 0.53 %.
One may be missing provided the associated pack is turned off (Refer to MEL/MI-21-52 Air
Conditioning Pack).
CDL-23 COMMUNICATION
CDL-23-01 Static Discharger
Static Discharger
Illustration Static Discharger
• Performance:
The following performance penalties are applicable:
‐ Takeoff and approach climb performance limiting weights are reduced by 1 180 kg
(2 601 lb)
‐ En route performance limiting weight is reduced by 1 620 kg (3 571 lb)
‐ Fuel consumption is increased by 3.14 %.
27-06 Flap Track Fairing Rear Top Cover and Tail Cone
Applicable to: A319
ILLUSTRATION FLAP TRACK FAIRING REAR TOP COVER AND TAIL CONE
Applicable to: A319
• Performance:
The following performance penalties are applicable:
‐ Takeoff and approach climb performance limiting weights are reduced by 63 kg (139 lb)
per missing seal
‐ En route performance limiting weight is reduced by 72 kg (159 lb) per missing seal
‐ If two or more seals are missing, fuel consumption is increased by 0.16 % per missing seal.
CDL-28 FUEL
CDL-28-01 Refuel/Defuel Coupling Cap 101 QM Or 41 QM
Refuel/Defuel Coupling Cap 101 QM Or 41 QM
Illustration Refuel/Defuel Coupling Cap 101 QM or 41 QM
CDL-28-02 Refuel Panel Door 192MB
Refuel Panel Door
Illustration Refuel Panel Door 192MB
CDL-33 LIGHTS
CDL-33-01 Wing/Engine Scan light Cover 3LX, 4LX
Wing/Engine Scan Light Cover 3LX, 4LX
Illustration Wing/Engine Scan light Cover 3LX, 4LX
CDL-33-02 Taxi Light Lamp 8LR
Taxi Light Lamp 8LR
Illustration Taxi Light Lamp 8LR
CDL-33-03 Rear Navigation Light Lens 15LA
Rear Navigation Light Lens 15LA
Illustration Rear Navigation Light Lens 15LA
CDL-33-04 Upper 7LV and Lower 6LV Anti-Collision (Beacon) Light Cover
Upper 7LV and Lower 6LV Anti-collision (Beacon) Light Cover
Illustration Upper and Lower Anti-Collision ( Beacon) Light Cover
CDL-33-05 Logo Light Lens (Cover) 3LY, 4LY
Logo Light Lens (Cover) 3LY, 4LY
Illustration Logo Light Lens (Cover) 3LY, 4LY
CDL-33-07 Landing Light Lens 7LB, 8LB
Landing Light Lens 7LB, 8LB
Illustration Landing Light Lens 7LB, 8LB
CDL-33-08 Turn OFF Light Lamp 3LC1, 3LC2
Turn OFF Light Lamp 3LC1, 3LC2
Illustration Turn OFF Light Lamp 3LC1, 3LC2
CDL-33-09 Takeoff Light Lamp 7LR
Takeoff light lamp 7LR
Illustration Takeoff Light Lamp 7LR
33-04 Upper 7LV and Lower 6LV Anti-collision (Beacon) Light Cover
Applicable to: A319
CDL-49 APU
CDL-49-01 APU Overpressure Release Door
APU Overpressure Release Door
Illustration APU Overpressure Release Door
CDL-51 STRUCTURE
CDL-51-01 Radome Conductive Strip
Radome conductive strip
Illustration Radome Conductive Strip
CDL-51-02 Passenger Door Scuff Plate
Passenger Door Scuff Plate
Illustration Passenger Door Scuff Plate
CDL-51-04 Fairing Aft Safety Stay Point 311 AL
Fairing Aft Safety Stay Point 311 AL
Illustration Fairing Aft Safety Stay Point 311AL
CDL-52 DOORS
CDL-52-01 Toilet Servicing and Drainage Door
Toilet Servicing And Drainage Door 172 AR
Illustration Toilet Servicing and Drainage Door
CDL-52-02 Access Door to Hydraulic Ground Connectors 197 CB - 197 EB - 198 CB
Access Door To Hydraulic Ground Connectors 197 CB - 197 EB - 198 CB
Illustration Access Door to Hydraulic Ground Connectors 197 CB - 197 EB - 198 CB
CDL-52-03 Access Door to Potable Water Filling and Drainage
Access Door To Potable Water Filling And Drainage 133 AL - 171 AL - 192 NB
Illustration Access Door to Potable Water Filling and Drainage
CDL-52-04 Access Door to Opening Control of Landing Gear Doors on Ground 195 BB–196 BB
Access Door To Opening Control Of Landing Gear Doors On Ground 195 BB - 196 BB
Illustration Access door to opening control of landing gear doors on ground 195 BB - 196 BB
CDL-52-05 Access Door to Air Conditioning Ground Supply 191 CB
Access Door To Air Conditioning Ground Supply 191 CB
Illustration Access door to air conditionning ground supply 191 CB
CDL-52-06 Forward Jacking Point Access Door
Forward Jacking Point Access Door
Illustration Forward jacking point access door
CDL-52-07 External Power Ground Connection Access Door Assy 121 AL
External Power Ground Connection Access Door Assy 121 AL
Illustration External Power Ground Connection Access Door Assy 121 AL
CDL-52-08 Access Door of Cargo Opening System 134 AR - 154 AR
Access Door Of Cargo Opening System 134 AR - 154 AR
Illustration Access Door of Cargo Opening System 134 AR - 154 AR
CDL-52-09 Nose Landing Gear Main Door (713, 714)
Nose Landing Gear Main Door (713, 714)
Illustration Nose Landing Gear Main Door (713, 714)
CDL-52-10 Nose Landing Gear Aft Door (715, 716)
Nose Landing Gear Aft Door (715, 716)
Illustration Nose Landing Gear Aft Door (715, 716)
CDL-52-11 Nose Landing Gear Leg Door (712)
Nose Landing Gear Leg Door (712)
Illustration Nose Landing Gear Leg Door (712)
CDL-52-12 Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742) (flight with gear up)
Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742) (flight with gear up)
Illustration Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742)
CDL-52-13 Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743) (flight with gear up)
Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743) (flight with gear up)
Illustration Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743)
CDL-52-14 Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742) (flight with gear down)
Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742) (Flight with gear down)
Illustration Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742)
CDL-52-15 Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743) (Flight with gear down)
Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743) (Flight with gear down)
Illustration Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743)
CDL-52-16 Main Landing Gear Door (734, 744) (Flight with gear down)
Main Landing Gear Door (734, 744) (Flight with gear down)
Illustration Main Landing Gear Door (734, 744)
CDL-52-18 Main Landing Gear Door : Seal on Secondary Hinged Fairing
Main Landing Gear Door : Seal On Secondary Hinged Fairing
Illustration Main Landing Gear Door : Seal on Secondary Hinged Fairing
CDL-52-19 Pax Door Upper Cover Plate
Pax Door Upper Cover Plate
Illustration Pax Door Upper Cover Plate
CDL-52-20 Access Door to HP Air Ground Connector 191 DB
Access Door To HP Air Ground Connector 191 DB
Illustration Access Door to HP Air Ground Connector 191 DB
CDL-52-21 Blue Hydraulic Access Door 197 FB
Blue Hydraulic Access Door 197 FB
Illustration Blue Hydraulic Access Door 197 FB
CDL-52-22 Forward Cargo Door Access Cover Panel 825 AR
Forward Cargo Door Access Cover Panel 825 AR
Illustration Forward Cargo Door Access Cover Panel 825 AR
CDL-52-23 Aft Cargo Door Access Cover Panel 826 AR
Aft Cargo Door Access Cover Panel 826 AR
Illustration Aft Cargo Door Access Cover Panel 826 AR
52-03 Access Door To Potable Water Filling And Drainage 133 AL - 171 AL - 192 NB
Applicable to: A319
52-04 Access Door To Opening Control Of Landing Gear Doors On Ground 195 BB - 196 BB
Applicable to: A319
52-12 Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742) (flight with gear up)
Applicable to: A319
52-13 Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743) (flight with gear up)
Applicable to: A319
52-14 Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742) (Flight with gear down)
Applicable to: A319
52-15 Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743) (Flight with gear down)
Applicable to: A319
52-16 Main Landing Gear Door (734, 744) (Flight with gear down)
Applicable to: A319
CDL-53 FUSELAGE
CDL-53-01 Belly Fairing Vent Louver Vane
Belly Fairing Vent Louver Vane
Illustration Belly Fairing Vent Louver Vane
CDL-53-03 Root Fillet Fairing
Root Fillet Fairing
Illustration Root Fillet Fairing
CDL-57 WINGS
CDL-57-01 Wing Tip Fence
Wing Tip Fence
Illustration Wing Tip Fence
CDL-57-02 Belly Fairing Sliding Panel
Belly Fairing Sliding Panel
Illustration Belly Fairing Sliding Panel
CDL-57-03 Outboard Flaps Rubbing Strip
Outboard Flap Rubbing Strip Items 10, 15, 20, 40
Illustration Outboard Flap Rubbing Strip
CDL-57-04 Inboard Flap Rubbing Strip
Inboard Flap Rubbing Strip items 1, 5, 10, 30
Illustration Inboard Flap Rubbing Strip
a)
57-01 Quantity installed
WING TIP FENCE 2
(m) Refer to AMM 57-31-00-040-001
One lower part of a wing tip fence may be missing provided the broken part is removed and
holes are covered.
• Performance:
The following performance penalties are applicable:
‐ Takeoff and approach climb performance limiting weights are reduced by 4 480 kg
(9 877 lb)
‐ En-route performance limiting weight is reduced by 378 kg (834 lb)
‐ Fuel consumption is increased by 0.88 %.
– or –
b)
57-01 Quantity installed
WING TIP FENCE 2
(m) Refer to AMM 57-31-00-040-001
One complete wing tip fence may be missing provided exposed interior structure is covered,
protective material is inspected before each flight and replaced if necessary.
• Performance:
The following performance penalties are applicable:
‐ Takeoff and approach climb performance limiting weights are reduced by 10 080 kg
(22 223 lb)
‐ En-route performance limiting weight is reduced by 756 kg (1 667 lb)
‐ Fuel consumption is increased by 1.69 %.
CDL-78 EXHAUST
CDL-78-01 Duct Opening Actuator
Duct Opening Actuator
Illustration Duct Opening Actuator
CDL-78-03 Thrust Reverser Blocker Door
Thrust Reverser Blocker Door
Illustration Thrust Reverser Blocker Door
CDL-78-04 Lockout Pin
Lockout Pin
Illustration Lockout Pin
CDL-23 COMMUNICATION
CDL-23-01 Static Discharger
Static Discharger
Illustration Static Discharger
27-06 Flap Track Fairing Rear Top Cover and Tail Cone
Applicable to: A320
CDL-28 FUEL
CDL-28-01 Refuel/Defuel Coupling Cap 101 QM Or 41 QM
Refuel/Defuel Coupling Cap 101 QM Or 41 QM
Illustration Refuel/Defuel Coupling Cap 101 QM or 41 QM
CDL-28-02 Refuel Panel Door 192MB
Refuel Panel Door
Illustration Refuel Panel Door 192MB
May be missing.
• Procedures:
If icing conditions expected:
For icing conditions definition, Refer to LIM-GEN Icing Conditions Definition.
Turn on engine and wing anti-ice.
CDL-33 LIGHTS
CDL-33-01 Wing/Engine Scan light Cover 3LX, 4LX
Wing/Engine Scan Light Cover 3LX, 4LX
Illustration Wing/Engine Scan light Cover 3LX, 4LX
CDL-33-02 Taxi Light Lamp 8LR
Taxi Light Lamp 8LR
Illustration Taxi Light Lamp 8LR
CDL-33-03 Rear Navigation Light Lens 15LA
Rear Navigation Light Lens 15LA
Illustration Rear Navigation Light Lens 15LA
CDL-33-04 Upper 7LV and Lower 6LV Anti-Collision (Beacon) Light Cover
Upper 7LV and Lower 6LV Anti-collision (Beacon) Light Cover
Illustration Upper and Lower Anti-Collision ( Beacon) Light Cover
CDL-33-05 Logo Light Lens (Cover) 3LY, 4LY
Logo Light Lens (Cover) 3LY, 4LY
Illustration Logo Light Lens (Cover) 3LY, 4LY
CDL-33-07 Landing Light Lens 7LB, 8LB
Landing Light Lens 7LB, 8LB
Illustration Landing Light Lens 7LB, 8LB
CDL-33-08 Turn OFF Light Lamp 3LC1, 3LC2
Turn OFF Light Lamp 3LC1, 3LC2
Illustration Turn OFF Light Lamp 3LC1, 3LC2
CDL-33-09 Takeoff Light Lamp 7LR
Takeoff light lamp 7LR
Illustration Takeoff Light Lamp 7LR
33-04 Upper 7LV and Lower 6LV Anti-collision (Beacon) Light Cover
Applicable to: A320
CDL-49 APU
CDL-49-01 APU Overpressure Release Door
APU Overpressure Release Door
Illustration APU Overpressure Release Door
CDL-51 STRUCTURE
CDL-51-01 Radome Conductive Strip
Radome conductive strip
Illustration Radome Conductive Strip
CDL-51-02 Passenger Door Scuff Plate
Passenger Door Scuff Plate
Illustration Passenger Door Scuff Plate
CDL-51-03 Bulk Cargo Door Scuff Plate
Bulk Cargo Door Scuff Plate
Illustration Bulk Cargo Door Scuff Plate
CDL-51-04 Fairing Aft Safety Stay Point 311 AL
Fairing Aft Safety Stay Point 311 AL
Illustration Fairing Aft Safety Stay Point 311AL
CDL-52 DOORS
CDL-52-01 Toilet Servicing and Drainage Door
Toilet Servicing And Drainage Door 172 AR
Illustration Toilet Servicing and Drainage Door
CDL-52-02 Access Door to Hydraulic Ground Connectors 197 CB - 197 EB - 198 CB
Access Door To Hydraulic Ground Connectors 197 CB - 197 EB - 198 CB
Illustration Access Door to Hydraulic Ground Connectors 197 CB - 197 EB - 198 CB
CDL-52-03 Access Door to Potable Water Filling and Drainage
Access Door To Potable Water Filling And Drainage 133 AL - 171 AL - 192 NB
Illustration Access Door to Potable Water Filling and Drainage
CDL-52-04 Access Door to Opening Control of Landing Gear Doors on Ground 195 BB - 196 BB
Access Door To Opening Control Of Landing Gear Doors On Ground 195 BB - 196 BB
Illustration Access door to opening control of landing gear doors on ground 195 BB - 196 BB
CDL-52-05 Access Door to Air Conditioning Ground Supply 191 CB
Access Door To Air Conditioning Ground Supply 191 CB
Illustration Access door to air conditionning ground supply 191 CB
CDL-52-06 Forward Jacking Point Access Door
Forward Jacking Point Access Door
Illustration Forward jacking point access door
CDL-52-07 External Power Ground Connection Access Door Assy 121 AL
External Power Ground Connection Access Door Assy 121 AL
Illustration External Power Ground Connection Access Door Assy 121 AL
CDL-52-08 Access Door of Cargo Opening System 134 AR - 154 AR
Access Door Of Cargo Opening System 134 AR - 154 AR
Illustration Access Door of Cargo Opening System 134 AR - 154 AR
CDL-52-09 Nose Landing Gear Main Door (713, 714)
Nose Landing Gear Main Door (713, 714)
Illustration Nose Landing Gear Main Door (713, 714)
CDL-52-10 Nose Landing Gear Aft Door (715, 716)
Nose Landing Gear Aft Door (715, 716)
Illustration Nose Landing Gear Aft Door (715, 716)
CDL-52-11 Nose Landing Gear Leg Door (712)
Nose Landing Gear Leg Door (712)
Illustration Nose Landing Gear Leg Door (712)
CDL-52-12 Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742) (flight with gear up)
Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742) (flight with gear up)
Illustration Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742)
CDL-52-13 Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743) (flight with gear up)
Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743) (flight with gear up)
Illustration Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743)
CDL-52-14 Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742) (flight with gear down)
Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742) (Flight with gear down)
Illustration Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742)
CDL-52-15 Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743) (Flight with gear down)
Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743) (Flight with gear down)
Illustration Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743)
CDL-52-16 Main Landing Gear Door (734, 744) (Flight with gear down)
Main Landing Gear Door (734, 744) (Flight with gear down)
Illustration Main Landing Gear Door (734, 744)
CDL-52-17 Bulk Door Outer Handle
Bulk Door Outer Handle
Illustration Bulk Door Outer Handle
52-03 Access Door To Potable Water Filling And Drainage 133 AL - 171 AL - 192 NB
Applicable to: A320
52-04 Access Door To Opening Control Of Landing Gear Doors On Ground 195 BB - 196 BB
Applicable to: A320
52-12 Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742) (flight with gear up)
Applicable to: A320
52-13 Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743) (flight with gear up)
Applicable to: A320
52-14 Main Landing Gear Door (732, 742) (Flight with gear down)
Applicable to: A320
52-15 Main Landing Gear Door (733, 743) (Flight with gear down)
Applicable to: A320
52-16 Main Landing Gear Door (734, 744) (Flight with gear down)
Applicable to: A320
CDL-53 FUSELAGE
CDL-53-01 Belly Fairing Vent Louver Vane
Belly Fairing Vent Louver Vane
Illustration Belly Fairing Vent Louver Vane
CDL-53-03 Root Fillet Fairing
Root Fillet Fairing
Illustration Root Fillet Fairing
CDL-57 WINGS
CDL-57-01 Wing Tip Fence
Wing Tip Fence
Illustration Wing Tip Fence
CDL-57-02 Belly Fairing Sliding Panel
Belly Fairing Sliding Panel
Illustration Belly Fairing Sliding Panel
CDL-57-03 Outboard Flaps Rubbing Strip
Outboard Flap Rubbing Strip Items 10, 15, 20, 40
Illustration Outboard Flap Rubbing Strip
CDL-57-04 Inboard Flap Rubbing Strip
Inboard Flap Rubbing Strip items 1, 5, 10, 30
Illustration Inboard Flap Rubbing Strip
CDL-78 EXHAUST
CDL-78-01 Duct Opening Actuator
Duct Opening Actuator
Illustration Duct Opening Actuator
CDL-78-03 Thrust Reverser Blocker Door
Thrust Reverser Blocker Door
Illustration Thrust Reverser Blocker Door
CDL-78-04 Lockout Pin
Lockout Pin
Illustration Lockout Pin